Manual Siae Alc Plus 1l3265
This document was ed by and they confirmed that they have the permission to share it. If you are author or own the copyright of this book, please report to us by using this report form. Report 3i3n4
Overview 26281t
& View Manual Siae Alc Plus as PDF for free.
More details 6y5l6z
- Words: 29,588
- Pages: 188
AL PDH Radio systems Compact version Compact plus version
manual
MN.00142.E - 009 Volume 1/1
The information contained in this handbook is subject to change without notice. Property of Siae Microelettronica S.p.A. All rights reserved according to the law and according to the international regulations. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, without written permission from Siae Microelettronica S.p.A. Unless otherwise specified, reference to a Company, name, data and address produced on the screen displayed is purely indicative aiming at illustrating the use of the product. MS-DOS®, MS Windows® are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation HP®, HP OpenView NNM and HP–UX are Hewlett Packard Company ed trademarks. UNIX is a UNIX System Laboratories ed trademark. Oracle® is a Oracle Corporation ed trademark. Linux term is a trademark ed by Linus Torvalds, the original author of the Linux operating system. Linux is freely distributed according the GNU General Public License (GPL). Other products cited here in are constructor ed trademarks.
Components
Section 1. GUIDE
7
1
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY ............................................................................... 7
2
FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND SAFETY RULES .......................................... 8 2.1
FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK ..................................................................... 8 2.1.1 Artificial respiration .................................................................................. 8 2.1.2 Treatment of burns .................................................................................. 8
2.2 3
SAFETY RULES .................................................................................................10
PURPOSE AND STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL ............................................................11 3.1
PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL .................................................................................11
3.2
AUDIENCE BASIC KNOWLEDGE ..........................................................................11
3.3
STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL .............................................................................11
Section 2. DESCRIPTIONS AND SPECIFICATION
13
4
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS.........................................................................................13
5
SYSTEM PRESENTATION ..........................................................................................15 5.1
RADIO SYSTEM OVERVIEW ................................................................................15 5.1.1 General .................................................................................................15
5.2
COMPLIANCE WITH INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS ................................................15
5.3
APPLICATIONS .................................................................................................15
5.4
SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE ....................................................................................16 5.4.1 IDU.......................................................................................................16 5.4.2 ODU......................................................................................................16
5.5
MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS ....................................................................................17 5.5.1 Management ports ..................................................................................17 5.5.2 Protocols ...............................................................................................17
6
EQUIPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS...............................................................21 6.1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION ...............................................................................21
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
1
7
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE INDOOR UNIT ...............................................................29 7.1 7.2
GENERAL.........................................................................................................29 TRAFFIC INTERFACE .........................................................................................29 7.2.1 2 Mbit/s Interface ...................................................................................29 7.2.2 Ethernet interface (optional).....................................................................30
7.3
SERVICE CHANNEL INTERFACE...........................................................................30 7.3.1
V.28 low speed synchronous/asynchronous data ........................................30
7.3.2 Alarm interface.......................................................................................30 7.3.3 64 kbit/s contra–directional interface V.11 (optional) ...................................30 7.3.4 Network Management Interface ................................................................31 7.4
8
MODULATOR/DEMODULATOR .............................................................................31
7.5
CABLE INTERFACE ............................................................................................32
7.6
AVAILABLE LOOPS ............................................................................................32
DESCRIPTION OF THE INDOOR UNIT – PDH INTERFACES ........................................33 8.1
1+0/1+1 IDU...................................................................................................33 8.1.1 Line interface .........................................................................................33 8.1.2 Radio interface .......................................................................................34 8.1.3 Equipment controller ...............................................................................35
8.2
IDU LOOPS ......................................................................................................36 8.2.1 Tributary loop........................................................................................36 8.2.2 Baseband unit loop .................................................................................36 8.2.3
9
IDU loop ...............................................................................................37
DESCRIPTION OF THE INDOOR UNIT – ETHERNET INTERFACES ..............................45 9.1
TREATMENT OF ETHERNET SIGNALS ...................................................................45 9.1.1 2 Mbit/s tributaries..................................................................................46 9.1.2
Electrical Ethernet interface.....................................................................46
9.1.3 Front LEDs of Ethernet ports ............................................................46 9.1.4 Bridge/switch function .............................................................................46 9.1.5 Ethernet Full Duplex function....................................................................47 9.1.6 Link Loss Forwarding ...............................................................................48 9.1.7 MDI/MDIX cross–over..............................................................................48 9.1.8 VLAN functionality...................................................................................48 9.1.9 Switch organized by port .........................................................................48 9.1.10 Switch organized by VLAN ID ...................................................................49 9.1.11 Layer 2, Priority function, QoS, 802.1p ......................................................50 10 CHARACTERISTICS OF THE OUTDOOR UNIT .............................................................54 10.1
GENERAL.........................................................................................................54
10.2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION ...............................................................................54
11 DESCRIPTION OF THE OUTDOOR UNIT ....................................................................56 11.1
GENERAL.........................................................................................................56
11.2
TRANSMIT SECTION..........................................................................................56
11.3
RECEIVE SECTION ............................................................................................57
11.4
CABLE INTERFACE ............................................................................................57
11.5
ATPC OPERATION .............................................................................................57
11.6
1+1 Tx SYSTEM ...............................................................................................58
11.7
POWER SUPPLY ................................................................................................58
12 24/48 VOLT DC/DC CONVERTER D52089 .................................................................63
2
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
12.1
GENERAL.........................................................................................................63
12.2
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ..........................................................................63
12.3
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS .........................................................................63
Section 3. INSTALLATION
67
13 INSTALLATION AND PROCEDURES FOR ENSURING ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY ......................................................................................................67 13.1
GENERAL.........................................................................................................67
13.2
MECHANICAL INSTALLATION..............................................................................67 13.2.1 IDU installation.......................................................................................67
13.3
ELECTRICAL WIRING.........................................................................................68
13.4
GROUNDING CONNECTION ................................................................................69
14 ALC CONNECTIONS .........................................................................................70 14.1
CONNECTOR USE FOR 1+0/1+1 ALC VERSION .....................................................70
14.2
STANDARD VERSION CONNECTORS ....................................................................71
15 ALC PLUS CONNECTIONS ................................................................................74 15.1
CONNECTOR USE FOR 1+0/1+1 ALC PLUS VERSION .............................................74
16 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA .............80 16.1
INSTALLATION KIT ...........................................................................................80
16.2
REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) .............................................80
16.3
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ...............................................................................81
16.4
GROUNDING ....................................................................................................82
17 INSTALLATION ONTO THE WALL OF THE ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA.............94 17.1
INSTALLATION KIT ...........................................................................................94
17.2
REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) .............................................94
17.3
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ..............................................................................95
17.4
GROUNDING ....................................................................................................96
18 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA (KIT V52191, V52192)...........................................................................................105 18.1
FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 105
18.2
INSTALLATION KIT ......................................................................................... 105
18.3
REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 105
18.4
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 106 18.4.1 Installation onto the pole of the system and the antenna ................ 106 18.4.2 Installation of ODU................................................................................ 107 18.4.3 ODU installation.................................................................................... 107
18.5
ANTENNA AIMING........................................................................................... 108
18.6
GROUNDING .................................................................................................. 108
19 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA (KIT V32307, V32308, V32309) .............................................................................124 19.1
FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 124
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
3
19.2
INSTALLATION KIT ......................................................................................... 124
19.3
REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 125
19.4
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 125
19.5
1+0 MOUNTING PROCEDURES ......................................................................... 126 19.5.1 Setting antenna polarization ................................................................... 126 19.5.2 Installation of the centring ring on the antenna ......................................... 126 19.5.3 Installation of 1+0 ODU ............................................................. 126 19.5.4 Installation onto the pole of the assembled structure ................................. 126 19.5.5 Installation of ODU (on 1+0 )....................................................... 126 19.5.6 Antenna aiming .................................................................................... 127 19.5.7 ODU grounding..................................................................................... 127
19.6
1+1 MOUNTING PROCEDURES ......................................................................... 127 19.6.1 Installation of Hybrid ............................................................................. 127 19.6.2 Installation of ODUs (on hybrid for 1+1 version) ....................................... 128
20 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE 4 GHz ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA (KIT V32323).........................................................................................................136 20.1
INSTALLATION KIT ......................................................................................... 136
20.2
REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 136
20.3
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 136
Section 4. LINE-UP
143
21 LINE–UP OF THE RADIO HOP .................................................................................143 21.1
LINE–UP OF THE RADIO HOP............................................................................ 143 21.1.1 Antenna alignment and received field measurement .................................. 143 21.1.2 Network element configuration ............................................................... 144 21.1.3 Radio checks ........................................................................................ 144
22 LINE–UP OF ETHERNET TRAFFIC (FOR IDU WITH ETHERNET MODULE ONLY) ........146 22.1
GENERAL....................................................................................................... 146
22.2
LOCAL LAN–1 PORT TO REMOTE LAN–1 PORT (TRANSPARENT CONNECTION LAN PER PORT)..................................................................................................... 146
22.3
LOCAL LAN–1 PORT TO REMOTE LAN–1 PORT (WITH VLANs) ................................ 151
22.4
3 TO 1 PORT CONNECTIONS ............................................................................ 154
22.5
3 TO 1 PORT CONNECTIONS, SETTINGS FOR UNTAGGED TRAFFIC ........................ 154
22.6
3 TO 1 PORT CONNECTIONS, SETTINGS FOR TAGGED AND UNTAGGED TRAFFIC .... 157
22.7
3 TO 1 CONNECTIONS: EXAMPLES OF PRIORITY MANAGEMENT ............................ 158
Section 5. MAINTENANCE
163
23 PERIODICAL CHECKS .............................................................................................163 23.1
4
GENERAL....................................................................................................... 163
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
23.2
CHECKS TO BE CARRIED OUT .......................................................................... 163
24 TROUBLESHOOTING...............................................................................................164 24.1 24.2
GENERAL....................................................................................................... 164 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE ..................................................................... 164 24.2.1 Loop facilities ....................................................................................... 164 24.2.2 Alarm messages processing.................................................................... 165
25 EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION /SAVE/. PARAMETER MODIFICATION AND CREATION OF VIRTUAL CONFIGURATIONS. ..........................166 25.1
SCOPE .......................................................................................................... 166
25.2
PROCEDURE................................................................................................... 166 25.2.1 General equipment configuration............................................................ 166 25.2.2 Addresses and routing table ................................................................... 167 25.2.3 Remote Element Table........................................................................... 168
26 BACK UP FULL EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION WITHOUT POSSIBILITY OF MODIFYING THE PARAMETERS .................................................................................................169 26.1
SCOPE .......................................................................................................... 169
26.2
CONFIGURATION ............................................................................... 169
26.3
CONFIGURATION .......................................................................... 169
Section 6. PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION
171
27 PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION .......................................................................171 27.1
GENERAL....................................................................................................... 171
Section 7. COMPOSITION
173
28 COMPOSITION OF THE INDOOR UNIT ....................................................................173 28.1
GENERAL....................................................................................................... 173
28.2
ALC IDU PART NUMBER ................................................................................... 173
28.3
ALC PLUS IDU PART NUMBER ........................................................................... 174
29 COMPOSITION OF OUTDOOR UNIT.........................................................................175 29.1
GENERAL....................................................................................................... 175
29.2
AL ODU ......................................................................................................... 175
29.3
AS ODU......................................................................................................... 175
Section 8.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
5
LISTS AND ASSISTANCE SERVICE
177
30 LIST OF FIGURES ...................................................................................................177 31 LIST OF TABLES .....................................................................................................181 32 ASSISTANCE SERVICE............................................................................................183 32.1
6
RQ.00961 MODULE ......................................................................................... 183
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Section 1. GUIDE
1
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
SIAE Microelettronica S.p.A. declares that the products: •
Digital radio relay system
AL7
•
Digital radio relay system
AL8
•
Digital radio relay system
AL11
•
Digital radio relay system
AL13
•
Digital radio relay system
AL15
•
Digital radio relay system
AL18
•
Digital radio relay system
AL23
•
Digital radio relay system
AL25
•
Digital radio relay system
AL28
•
Digital radio relay system
AL38
comply with the essential requirements of article 3 of the R&TTE Directive (1999/05/EC) and therefore is marked CE. The following standards apply: •
EN 60950 200 "Safety of information technology equipment".
•
EN 301 489-4 V.1.3.1 (2002-8): "Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and services; Part 4. Specific conditions for fixed radio links and ancillary equipment and services"
•
ETSI EN 301 751 V.1.1. (2002-12): "Fixed Radio Systems; Point-to point equipment and antennas; generic harmonized standard for point-to-point digital fixed radio systems and antennas covering the essential requirements under article 3.2 of the 1999/5/EC Directive".
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
7
2
FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND SAFETY RULES
2.1
FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK
Do not touch the patient with bare hands until the circuit has been opened. Open the circuit by switching off the line switches. If that is not possible protect yourself with dry material and free the patient from the conductor.
2.1.1
Artificial respiration
It is important to start mouth resuscitation at once and to call a doctor immediately. Suggested procedure for mouth to mouth resuscitation method is described in the Tab.1.
2.1.2
Treatment of burns
This treatment should be used after the patient has regained consciousness. It can also be employed while artificial respiration is being applied (in this case there should be at least two persons present). Warning
8
•
Do not attempt to remove clothing from burnt sections
•
Apply dry gauze on the burns
•
Do not apply ointments or other oily substances.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Tab.1 - Procedure for mouth to mouth resuscitation method Step
Description
1
Lay the patient on his back with his arms parallel to the body. If the patient is laying on an inclined plane, make sure that his stomach is slightly lower than his chest. Open the patients mouth and check that there is no foreign matter in mouth (dentures, chewing gum, etc.).
2
Figure
Kneel beside the patient level with his head. Put an hand under the patient's head and one under his neck. Lift the patient's head and let it recline backwards as far as possible.
3
Shift the hand from the patient's neck to his chin and his mouth, the index along his jawbone, and keep the other fingers closed together. While performing these operations take a good supply of oxygen by taking deep breaths with your mouth open.
4
With your thumb between the patient's chin and mouth keep his lips together and blow into his nasal cavities.
5
While performing these operations observe if the patient's chest rises. If not it is possible that his nose is blocked: in that case open the patient's mouth as much as possible by pressing on his chin with your hand, place your lips around his mouth and blow into his oral cavity. Observe if the patient's chest heaves. This second method can be used instead of the first even when the patient's nose is not obstructed, provided his nose is kept closed by pressing the nostrils together using the hand you were holding his head with. The patient's head must be kept sloping backwards as much as possible.
6
Start with ten rapid expirations, hence continue at a rate of twelve/ fifteen expirations per minute. Go on like this until the patient has regained conscious-ness, or until a doctor has ascertained his death.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
9
2.2
SAFETY RULES
When the equipment units are provided with the plate, shown in Fig.1, it means that they contain components electrostatic charge sensitive.
Fig.1 - Components electrostatic charge sensitive In order to prevent the units from being damaged while handling, it is advisable to wear an elasticised band (Fig.2) around the wrist ground connected through coiled cord (Fig.3).
Band
Elasticized
Fig.2 - Elasticised band
Fig.3 - Coiled cord The units showing the label, shown in Fig.4, include laser diodes and the emitted power can be dangerous for eyes; avoid exposure in the direction of optical signal emission.
LASER
Fig.4 - Laser diodes
10
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
3
PURPOSE AND STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL
3.1
PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL
The purpose of this manual consists in providing the with information which allows to operate and maintain the ALC radio family. Warning: This manual does not include information relevant to the SCT/LCT management program windows and relevant application. They will provided by the program itself as help-on line.
3.2
AUDIENCE BASIC KNOWLEDGE
The following knowledge and skills are required to operate the equipment: •
a basic understanding of microwave transmission
•
installation and maintenance experience on digital radio system
•
a good knowledge of IP/OSI networks and routing policy.
3.3
STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL
The manual is subdivided into sections each of them developing a specific topic entitling the section. Each section consists of a set of chapters, enlarging the main subject master.
Section 1 - Guide It provides the information about the main safety rules and expounds the purpose and the structure of the manual.
Section 2 - Description and specifications It traces the broad line of equipment operation and lists the main technical characteristics of the whole equipment and units it consists of. List of abbreviation meaning is also supplied.
Section 3 - Installation The mechanical installation procedures are herein set down as well as the electrical connections. The content of the tool kit (if supplied) is also listed.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
11
Section 4 - Line-Up Line-up procedures are described as well as checks to be carried out for the equipment correct operation. The list of the instruments to be used and their characteristics are also set down.
Section 5 - Maintenance The routine maintenance actions are described as well as fault location procedures in order to identify the faulty unit and to re-establish the operation after its replacement with a spare one.
Section 6 - Programming and supervision The ALC radio family is programmed and supervised using different software tools. Some of them are already available, some other will be available in the future. This section lists the tools implemented and indicates if descriptions are already available. Each description of software tools is supplied in a separated manual.
Section 7 - Composition Position, part numbers of the components the equipment consist of, are shown in this section.
Section 8 - Lists and assistance service It provides the lists of figures ans tables and the assistance service.
12
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Section 2. DESCRIPTIONS AND SPECIFICATION
4
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
-
AF
Assured Forwarding
-
ALC
Access Link Compact Version
-
ALC plus
Access Link Compact Plus Version
-
AIS
Alarm Indication Signal
-
ATPC
Automatic Transmit Power Control
-
BB
Baseband
-
BBER
Background Block Error Radio
-
BER
Bit Error Rate
-
DS
Differentiated Service Code Point
-
DSP
Digital Signal Processing
-
EMC/EMI
Electromagnetic Compatibility/Electromagnetic Interference
-
EOC
Embedded Overhead Channel
-
ERC
European Radiocommunication Committee
-
ESD
Electrostatic Discharge
-
FEC
Forward Error Corrector
-
FEM
Fast Ethernet Module
-
HDLC
High Level Data Link Control
-
IDU
Indoor Unit
-
IF
Intermediate Frequency
-
IpToS
Type of Service IP
-
LAN
Local Area Network
-
LAPS
Link Access Procedure SDH
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
13
14
-
LCT
Local Craft Terminal
-
LIM
Line Interface Module
-
LLF
Link Loss Forwarding
-
LOF
Loss Of Frame
-
LOS
Loss Of Signal
-
MAC
Media Access Control
-
MDI
Medium Dependent Interface
-
MDIX
Medium Dependent Interface Crossover
-
MIB
Management Information Base
-
MMIC
Monolitic Microwave Integrated Circuit
-
MTBF
Mean Time Between Failure
-
NE
Network Element
-
ODU
Outdoor Unit
-
OSI
Open System Interconnection
-
PDH
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
-
PPI
Plesiochronous Physical Interface
-
PPP
Point to Point Protocol
-
PTOS
Priority Type Of Service
-
RIM
Radio Interface Module
-
SCT
Subnetwork Craft Terminal
-
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol
-
T/IP
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
-
TOS
Type Of Service
-
VID
Virtual LAN Identifier
-
VLAN
Virtual LAN
-
WFQ
Wait Fair Queue
-
Wayside Traffic
Additional 2 Mbit/s Traffic
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
5
SYSTEM PRESENTATION
5.1
RADIO SYSTEM OVERVIEW
5.1.1
General
AL is SIAE's PDH radio series for low-to-medium transmission capacities in frequency bands from 7 to 38 GHz. Different hardware versions offer a range of tributaries traffic from 2xE1 to 32xE1, with or without Ethernet traffic, on 4QAM, 16QAM and 32QAM modulation, with capacity up to 105 Mbit/s. Reduced cost, high reliability, compact size, light weight and full programmability are the key features of this radio series.
5.2
COMPLIANCE WITH INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS
The equipment complies with the following international standards: •
EN 301 489-4 for EMC
•
ITU-R recommendations for all frequency bands
•
EN 300 132-2 characteristics for power supply
•
EN 300 019 environmental characteristics (Operation class 3.2 for IDU and class 4.1 for ODU; storage: class 1.2; transport: class 2.3)
•
EN 60950 for safety.
5.3
APPLICATIONS
AL main applications are: •
radio communication between GSM cells
•
radio links for voice and data transmission
•
spur routes for high capacity radio system
•
emergency links
•
Ethernet traffic in point to point communication.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
15
5.4
SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
The AL radio equipment consist of two separate units: •
the indoor unit (IDU) that houses tributary interfaces, Ethernet ports modem and controller units
•
the outdoor unit (ODU) that converts IF signals into RF signals and vice versa.
The two units are interconnected via coaxial cable. Fig.5 and Fig.6 show a typical IDU/ODU layout whereas Fig.7 and Fig.8 show the radio block diagram in 1+0 and 1+1 configuration respectively.
5.4.1
IDU
The IDU is available in the following hardware versions: •
•
ALC -
1 rack unit compact IDU, 1+0 configuration, 2/4/8 E1
-
1 rack unit compact IDU, 1+0 configuration, 2/4/8/16 E1
-
1 rack unit compact IDU, 1+1 configuration, 2/4/8 E1
-
1 rack unit compact IDU, 1+1 configuration, 2/4/8/16 E1
ALC plus -
1 rack unit compact plus IDU, 1+0 configuration, 2/4/5/8/10/16 E1
-
1 rack unit compact plus IDU, 1+1 configuration, 2/4/5/8/10/16 E1
-
1 rack unit compact plus IDU, 1+0 configuration, 2/4/5/8/10/16/20/32 E1
-
1 rack unit compact plus IDU, 1+0 configuration, 2/4/5/8/10/16/20/32 E1
Ethernet module can be housed inside IDU, as option, for Ethernet traffic. ALC and ALC plus IDUs consist of a single circuit board plugged into a wired shelf. Line interfaces house tributary connections and, through a multiplexing/demultiplexing and bit insertion/extraction process, supply/receive the aggregate signal to/from the modulator/demodulator. Main difference between ALC IDU and ALC plus IDU is the increased capacity (up to 32E1 and up to 105 Mbit/s of total capacity) and the possibility to use the bandwidth of transmitted channel more efficiently: 5 E1 streams can be transmitted in the bandwidth previously used by 4 E1 only, 10 E1 streams can be transmitted in the bandwidth previously used by 8 E1 only, 20 E1 streams can be transmitted in the bandwidth previously used by 16 E1 only. Line interfaces carry out the digital processing for the QAM modulator and, in 1+1 configuration, duplicate the main signals on the transmission side and perform the changeover on the receive side. Interfaces towards the ODU house the cable interface for bidirectional communication between ODU and IDU, and implement the IF section of the mo-demodulator. IDU power supply units process battery voltage and supply power to IDU and ODU circuits. The controller section of the radio houses service channels interfaces, stores IDU firmware, interfaces SIAE management systems though dedicated supervision ports, and routes external and internal alarms to relay s.
5.4.2
ODU
The ODU houses the interface towards the IDU on one side, and towards the antenna flange on the other. The ODU shifts the incoming QAM-modulated carrier to RF frequency through a double conversion. The opposite occurs at the receive side, when the IF-converted carrier is sent to the IDU demodulator. Antenna coupling in 1+1 systems is done through a balanced or unbalanced hybrid. Two versions of ODU are available, ODU AL and ODU AS; they differ in output power.
16
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
5.5
MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS
AL radio can be controlled locally and remotely via SIAE supervision software: •
SCT/LCT: a Windows-based management system for small networks (up to 100 NE)
•
NMS5-LX: a Linux-based management system for small-to-medium networks (up to 750 NE)
•
NMS5-UX: a Unix-based management system for large networks (up to 2500 NE)
These systems provide a friendly graphic interface complying with current standard use of keyboards, mouse and windows.
5.5.1
Management ports
AL radio terminals connect to the supervision network via the following communication ports: •
Ethernet 10BaseT Port (2 port in ALC plus)
•
USB port
5.5.2
Protocols
SNMP along with IP or OSI protocol stacks are used to manage AL operation.
Fig.5 - 1+1 ODU typical configuration with integrated antenna
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
17
TXRX 1 2
Q3
LCT
TEST R AL
TX RX 1 2
Q3/2
V11
Q3/1
RS232
LCT IN/OUT
IN/OUT
DPLX DPLX LINK 2 LINK 3 ACT ACT 10/100 BTX
ALC plus 32E1 + Ethernet
TEST R AL
DPLX LINK 1 ACT
ALC 16E1 + Ethernet
2
Trib. 1-8
Trib. 17-24
1
3
4
Trib. 9-16
Trib. 25-32
5
6
7
1
48V1
9
M 3.15A 250VAC
1
1
8
–
1
3
11
PS 1 2
PS2
2 48VDC
12 PS1
- 48VDC
10/100 BaseT
2
10 2
-
15
2
16
M 3.15A 250VAC
– 48V2
14
ACT LINK
DPX
13
+
18 +
+
+
Fig.6 - 1+1 IDU typical configuration
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
1
1
2
2
Fig.7 - 1+1 equipment block diagram
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
19
SCT/LCT
Main traffic
Services
Services
Main traffic
DSP DEM
DSP DEM
DSP MOD
MAIN
Controller Unit
ALARM
ODU CONTROL
IDU CONTROL
BE
BI
CONTROLLER
DEMUX
MUX
Line Interface
BATT.
INTERF.
MOD
48 V BATT.
IDU
Radio Interface 2
ODU 2 CONTROLLER
IF DEM
INTERF.
CABLE
Radio Interface 1
ODU 1 CONTROLLER
IF MOD
48 V
IF DEM
CABLE
IF
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE INTERF. 2
CABLE INTERF. 1
Rx2
Tx2
Rx1
Tx1
SW CONTR.
SW CONTR.
ODU 2
1.5/7.5 dB
4 dB or
ODU 1
Fig.8 - 1+0 non expandable equipment block diagram
20
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
SCT/LCT
Main traffic
Services
Services
Main traffic
DSP DEM
DS P MOD
MAIN
ALARM
ODU CONTROL
IDU CONTROL
BE
BI
CONTROLLER
DEMUX
MUX
48 V BATT.
ODU CONTROLLER
DEM
IF
MOD
IF
IDU
INTERF.
CABLE
CABLE CABLE INTERF. 1 Rx1
Tx1 SW CONTR.
ODU
6
EQUIPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
6.1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
-
-
-
Frequency range -
7 GHz
7.11 to 7.7 GHz
-
8 GHz
7.7 to 8.5 GHz
-
11 GHz
10.7 to 11.7 GHz
-
13 GHz
12.75 to 13.25 GHz
-
15 GHz
14.4 to 15.35 GHz
-
18 GHz
17.7 to 19.7 GHz
-
23 GHz
21.2 to 23.6 GHz
-
25 GHz
24.5 to 26.5 GHz
-
28 GHz
27.5 to 29.5 GHz
-
38 GHz
37 to 39.5 GHz
RF channel arrangement -
7 GHz
ITU-R Rec F.385
-
8 GHz
ITU-R Rec F.386
-
11 GHz
no ITU-R Rec. for PDH 11 GHz band
-
13 GHz
ITU-R Rec F.497
-
15 GHz
ITU-R Rec F.636
-
18 GHz
ITU-R Rec F.595
-
23 GHz
ERC/T/R 13-02 Annex A or ITU-R Rec F.637
-
25 GHz
ERC/T/R 13-02 Annex B
-
28 GHz
ERC/T/R 13-02 Annex C
-
38 GHz
ITU-R Rec F.749
Go-return frequency -
7 GHz
245/196/168/161/154 MHz
-
8 GHz
311.32 MHz
-
11 GHz
530 MHz
-
13 GHz
266 MHz
-
15 GHz
420/728 MHz
-
18 GHz
1010 MHz
-
23 GHz
1008/1232 MHz
-
25 GHz
1008 MHz
-
28 GHz
1008 MHz
-
38 GHz
1260 MHz
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
21
-
Transmission capacity
see Tab.2 Tab.2 Signal capacity
-
IDU type
Capacity
Configuration
ALC
2/4/8 E1 (max 16 Mbit/s)
1+0/1+1
ALC
2/4/8/16 E1 (max 32 Mbit/s)
1+0/1+1
ALC
2/4/8/16 E1 + 3x10/100BaseT (max 32 Mbit/s)
1+0/1+1
ALC
2/4/8/16 E1 + 3x10/100BaseT (max 64 Mbit/s)
1+0/1+1
ALC plus
2/4/5/8/10/16 E1 (max 32 Mbit/s)
1+0/1+1
ALC plus
2/4/5/8/10/16/20/32 E1 (max 64 Mbit/s)
1+0/1+1
ALC plus
2/4/5/8/10/16/20/32 E1 + 3x10/100BaseT (max 64 Mbit/s)
1+0/1+1
ALC plus
2/4/5/8/10/16/20/32 E1 + 3x10/100BaseT (max 105 Mbit/s)
1+0/1+1
Service channel capacity: -
64 kbit/s V11 co/contradirectional interface or V28 (1x9600 or 2x4800 baud)
-
RS232 PPP for supervision
-
EOW external module (optional) connected to V11 and RS232 ports
-
Antenna configuration
1+0 or 1+1 hot stand-by and 1 antenna, 1+1 frequency diversity on 1 cross polar antenna or two separated antennas
-
Frequency accuracy
± 5 ppm; ± 10 ppm ageing included
-
RF spurious emissions
according to ETSI EN 301 390
-
Modulation
4QAM/16QAM/32QAM (ALC plus only), see Tab.3 Tab.3 - Modulation and channel spacing
Modulation
4 Mbit/s
8 Mbit/s
16 Mbit/s
32 Mbit/s
64 Mbit/s
105 Mbit/s
4QAM
3.5 MHz
7 MHz
14 MHz
28 MHz
-
-
16QAM
-
3.5 MHz
7 MHz
14 MHz
28 MHz
-
32QAM (ALC plus)
-
-
-
-
-
28 MHz
-
Demodulation
coherent
-
Output power at the antenna side, 1+0 version
refer to Tab.4
-
Receiver threshold at the antenna side 1+0 version
refer to Tab.5 and Tab.6
-
22
Capacity
Additional losses both Tx and Rx sides, 1+1 version -
4 dB ± 0.5 dB
version with balanced hybrid
-
≤ 1.7 dB (branch 1) / ≤ 7 dB (branch 2)
version with unbalanced hybrid
-
Residual BER
1x10-11
-
Maximum input level for BER 10-3
-20 dBm
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Tab.4 - Nominal output power 1 dB tolerance - (1+0 version) ODU AL/ODU AS GHz
Output power 4QAM
Output power 16QAM
Output power 32QAM
7
+27/30 dBm
+22/26 dBm
+20/n.a. dBm
8
+27/30 dBm
+22/26 dBm
+20/n.a. dBm
11
+25/29 dBm
+20/25 dBm
-
13
+25/29 dBm
+20/25 dBm
+20/n.a. dBm
15
+25/28 dBm
+20/24 dBm
+20/n.a. dBm
18
+20/24 dBm
+15/20 dBm
+15/20 dBm
23
+20/23 dBm
+15/19 dBm
+15/19 dBm
25
+20/23 dBm
+15/19 dBm
+15/19 dBm
28
+19/22 dBm
+14/18 dBm
+14/18 dBm
32
+17/20 dBm
+13/16 dBm
+13/16 dBm
38
+17/20 dBm
+13/16 dBm
+13/16 dBm
Tab.5 - Guaranteed received threshold in 1+0 configuration (dBm) 4QAM GHz
16QAM
2x2
4x2
2x2
4x2
10-6
10-3
10-6
10-3
10-6
10-3
10-6
10-3
7
-91
-93
-88
-90
-
-
-84
-86
8
-91
-93
-88
-90
-
-
-84
-85
11
-90.5
-92.5
-87.5
-89.5
-
-
-83.5
-85.5
13
-90.5
-92.5
-87.5
-89.5
-83.5
-85.5
15
-90.5
-92.5
-87.5
-89.5
-
-
-83.5
-85.5
18
-90
-92
-87
-89
-
-
-84
-86
23
-90
-92
-87
-89
-
-
-83
-85
25
-89.5
-91.5
-86.5
-88.5
-
-
-82.5
-84.5
28
-89
-91
-86
-88
-
-
-82
-84
38
-88
-90
-85
-88
-
-
-81
-83
Tab.6 - Guaranteed received threshold in 1+0 configuration (dBm) 4QAM GHz
8x2
16QAM 16x2
8x2
16x2
32QAM 32x2
100
10–6
10–3
10–6
10–3
10–6
10–3
10–6
10–3
10–6
10–3
10–6
10–3
7
–85
–87
–82
–84
–81
–83
–78
–80
–75
–77
–72
–74
8
–85
–87
–82
–84
–81
–83
–78
–80
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
11
–84.5 –86.5 –81.5 –83.5 –80.5 –82.5 –77.5 –79.5 –74.5 –76.5 –71.5 –73.5
13
–84.5 –86.5 –81.5 –83.5 –80.5 –82.5 –77.5 –79.5 –74.5 –76.5 –71.5 –73.5
15
–84.5 –86.5 –81.5 –83.5 –80.5 –82.5 –77.5 –79.5 –74.5 –76.5 –71.5 –73.5
18
–84
–86
–81
–83
–80
–82
–77
–79
–74
–76
–71
–73
23
–84
–86
–81
–83
–80
–82
–77
–79
–73
–75
–70
–72
25
–83.5 –85.5 –80.5 –82.5 –79.5 –81.5 –76.5 –78.5 –72.5 –74.5 –69.5 –71.5
28
–83
–85
–80
–82
–79
–81
–76
–78
–72
–74
–69
–71
32
-82
-84
-80
-81
-78
-80
-75
-77
-72
-74
-69
-71
38
–82
–84
–80
–81
–78
–80
–75
–77
–71
–73
–68
–70
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
23
-
Power supply voltage
-40.8 to -57.6 Vdc
-
Power consumption
Fully equipped terminal with 370 m 1/4" IDU/ODU cable (refer to Tab.7). Tab.7 - Power consumption (ODU AL/ODU AS)
-
Configuration
Guaranteed power consumption (IDU) f≤15 GHz -40.8 to -57.6 Vdc
Guaranteed power consumption (IDU) f>15 GHz -40.8 to -57.6 Vdc
1+0
≤ 32W/34W
≤ 25W/34W
1+1
≤ 52W/62W
≤ 40W/62W
Power supply connector consumption
(refer to Tab.8)
Tab.8 - Power supply connector consumption Guaranteed consumption f≤15 GHz da - 40.8 Vdc
Guaranteed consumption f>15 GHz da –40.8 Vdc
≤1A
≤1 A
-
Fuse
-
Environmental conditions
-
3.15 A (M), 5x20 mm on front
-
Operational range for IDU
–5° C to +45° C
-
Operational range for ODU
–33° C to +55° C
-
Survival temperature range for IDU
–10° C to +55° C
-
Survival temperature range for ODU
–40° C to +60° C
-
Operational humidity for IDU
95% at +35° C
-
Operational humidity for ODU
weather proof according to IP65 environmental class
-
Heat dissipation of ODU Solar heat gain: not exceeding 5° C
Thermal resistance 0.5° C/W
-
Wind load
≤ 260 Km/h
Mechanical characteristics -
Dimensions
refer to Tab.9 Tab.9 - IDU/ODU dimensions Width (mm)
Height (mm)
Depth (mm)
ODU AL/ODU AS 1+0
250/255
255/255
100/121
ODU AL/ODU AS 1+1
278/358
255/255
280/280
480
45
260
IDU 1+0/1+1 -
Weight
refer to Tab.10 Tab.10 - IDU/ODU weight
ODU AL/ODU AS 1+0
4.5/5.5 Kg
ODU AL/ODU AS 1+0
13.3/15.5 Kg
IDU 1+0/1+1 Panning system 1+0/1+1
24
3.5/3.7 Kg 4.4 Kg
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
-
Mechanical layout Fig.13.
refer to typical Fig.9, Fig.10, Fig.11, Fig.12 and
Trib. 1–2–3–4
Q3
LCT
48V
IN/OUT
PS TEST R
AL Trib. 5–6–7–8
– +
Fig.9 - IDU ALC 1+0 (2/4/8xE1)
Trib. 1–2–3–4
Q3
LCT
Trib. 9–10–11–12
48V2
48V1
IN/OUT
PS1
TX RX TEST R AL
1
1
2 Trib. 5–6–7–8
1
2
Trib. 13–14–15–16
PS2
–
2
– +
+
Fig.10 - IDU ALC 1+1 (2/4/8/16xE1)
DPLX LINK 1 ACT TEST R AL
TXRX 1 2
DPLX DPLX 2 3 LINK LINK ACT ACT 10/100 BTX
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
9
11
12 PS1
13
14
1 LCT
Q3
15
16 1
2
IN/OUT
48V1
PS2
–
2
– 48V2 +
+
Fig.11 - IDU ALC 1+1 (up to 16xE1 coax. conn.) + Ethernet
V11
48VDC1
M 3.15A 250VAC
48VDC2
1
PS 1
2
2
Q3/2
Q3/1
LCT
IN/OUT
Trib. 1-8
1
Trib. 9-16
-
+
TX RX
Trib. 25-32
+
TEST R AL
Trib. 17-24
RS232
M 3.15A 250VAC
-
1
2
1
2
2
Fig.12 - IDU ALC plus 1+1 (2/4/5/8/10/16/20/32xE1)
Trib. 17-24
RS232
Trib. 25-32
DPX 2
1 TX RX
ACT LINK
10/100 BaseT 1 2
1 Q3/2
Q3/1
LCT
IN/OUT
Trib. 1-8
Trib. 9-16
M 3.15A
250VAC
+
TEST R AL
3
1
- 48VDC
PS 1 2
2 48VDC
+
V11
2
-
M 3.15A
250VAC
Fig.13 - IDU ALC plus 1+1 (2/4/5/8/10/16/20/32xE1) + Ethernet
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
25
Fig.14 - IDU 1+1 (up to 16x2 Mbit/s coax. conn.) + Ethernet module
Fig.15 - 1+1 ODU with separated antenna
26
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Fig.16 - 1+0 ODU with integral antenna (pole mounting)
Fig.17 - 1+1 ODU with integral antenna (pole mounting)
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
27
Fig.18 - 1+1 ODU with separated antenna (wall mounting)
28
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
7
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE INDOOR UNIT
7.1
GENERAL
The following IDU characteristics are guaranteed for the temperature range from –5° C to +45° C.
7.2
TRAFFIC INTERFACE
7.2.1
2 Mbit/s Interface
Input side -
Bit rate
2048 kbit/s ± 50 ppm
-
Line code
HDB3
-
Rated impedance
75 Ohm or 120 Ohm
-
Rated level
2.37 Vp/75 Ohm or 3 Vp/120 Ohm
-
Return loss
12 dB from 57 kHz to 102 kHz 18 dB from 102 kHz to 2048 kHz 14 dB from 2048 kHz to 3072 kHz
-
Max attenuation of the input cable
6 dB according to √ f trend
-
Accepted jitter
see mask in Table 2, CCITT Rec. G.823
-
Transfer function
see mask in Figure 1, CCITT Rec. G.742
-
Connector type
SUB-D, 25 pins
Output side -
Bit rate
2048 kbit/s ± 50 ppm
-
Rated impedance
75 Ohm or 120 Ohm
-
Rated level
2.37 Vp/75 Ohm or 3 Vp/120 Ohm
-
Output jitter
in accordance with G.742/G.823
-
Pulse shape
see mask in Figure 15, CCITT Rec. G.703
-
Connector type
SUB-D, 25 pins
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
29
7.2.2
Ethernet interface (optional)
RJ45 interface -
LAN type
Ethernet Twisted Pair 802.3 10BaseT/100BaseT
-
Connector
RJ45
-
Connection to LAN
direct with a CAT5 Twisted Pair
-
Protocol
T/IP or IPoverOSI
7.3
SERVICE CHANNEL INTERFACE
7.3.1
V.28 low speed synchronous/asynchronous data
-
Data interface
RS232
-
Electrical interface
CCITT Rec. V.28
-
Input speed
9600 baud
-
Control wires
DTR, DSR, DCD
7.3.2
Alarm interface
output -
Relay s
normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC)
-
Open s Rmin
100 MOhm at 500 Vdc
-
Open s Rmax
0.5 Ohm
-
Switching voltage Vmax
100 V
-
Switching current Imax
1A
input -
Equivalent circuit recognised as a closed
200 Ohm resist. (max) referred to ground
-
Equivalent circuit recognised as an open
60 kOhm (min) referred to ground
7.3.3
30
64 kbit/s contra–directional interface V.11 (optional)
-
Tolerance
±100 ppm
-
Equipment side
contra–directional
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
-
Coding
clock and data on independent wires
-
Electrical interface
see Rec. CCITT V.11
7.3.4
Network Management Interface
RJ45 interface -
LAN type
Ethernet Twisted Pair 802.3 10BaseT/100BaseT
-
Connector
RJ45
-
Connection to LAN
direct with a CAT5 Twisted Pair
-
Protocol
T/IP or IPoverOSI
LCT USB interface -
Electrical interface
USB 1.1 version
-
Baud rate
1.5 Mbit/s
-
Protocol
PPP
RS232 interface (optional) -
Electronic interface
V.28
-
Asynchronous baud rate
9600, 19200, 38400, 57600
-
Protocol
PPP
7.4 -
MODULATOR/DEMODULATOR
Carrier modulating frequency -
Tx side
330 MHz
-
Rx side
140 MHz
-
Type of modulatioln
4QAM/16QAM
-
Spectrum shaping versions
from 4 Mbit/s to 34 Mbit/s depending on different
-
Forma dello spettro
raised cosine (roll–off = 0.5)
-
Equalization
5 tap
-
FEC coding gain
2.5 dB at 10–6
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
31
7.5
CABLE INTERFACE
-
Interconnection with the ODU unit
single coaxial cable for both Tx and Rx
-
Cable length
up to 370 m. with 1/4" cable type
-
Rated impedance
50 Ohm
-
Signal running along the cable -
Tx nominal frequency
330 MHz
-
Rx nominal frequency
140 MHz
-
Transceiver management signals
388 kbit/s bidirectional
-
Carrier for transceiver management signals
IDU at ODU = 17.5 MHz/0 dBm ODU at IDU = 5.5 MHz/0 dBm
-
Remote power supply
direct from battery voltage
7.6
AVAILABLE LOOPS
The following loop are available within the IDU:
32
-
Tributary loop
-
Baseband loop
-
IDU loop
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
8
DESCRIPTION OF THE INDOOR UNIT – PDH INTERFACES
8.1
1+0/1+1 IDU
The following functional description covers the versions the IDU consists of as shown in chapter "Equipment technical specifications". The IDU is made up of a single motherboard that houses all the circuitry realizing the following functionalities: •
Line interface
•
Radio interface
•
Equipment controller
•
IDU loops.
The different versions of IDU are pointed out in following description only if it is necessary.
8.1.1
Line interface
The line interface performs the following operations: •
multiplexing process of the input tributaries
•
generation of the aggregate frame by aggregating multiplexed tributaries and service channel.
Bit extraction and demultiplexing process happens at the receive side.
Tx side Refer to Fig.19. The 2 Mbit/s input signal is code converted from HDB3 to NRZ format before being multiplexed. The multiplexing scheme depends on the number and the bit rate of the input tributaries. Attached figures show different multiplexing scheme as follows: •
Fig.20 – 2x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. The mux performs stuffing operation on each single tributary and generates a proprietary frame embedding the two tributaries to be sent to the Bit Insertion. Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side.
•
Fig.21 – 4x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. The mux aggregates the four 2 Mbit/s tributaries generating a 8448 kbit/s frame as per Recc. G.742. The multiplexed signal is then sent to the Bit Insertion. Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side.
•
Fig.22 – 8x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. The eight 2 Mbit/s tributaries are grouped in two 4x2 Mbit/s groups each of one generating a G742 frame structure at 8448 kbit/s to be sent to the next Bit Insertion. Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side.
•
Fig.23 – 16x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. The sixteen 2 Mbit/s tributaries are grouped in four 4x2 Mbit/s groups each of one generating a G.742 frame structure at 8448 kbit/s. A further multiplexing of the achieved four 8448 kbit/s streams will generate a frame structure at 34368 kbit/s as per Recc. G.751. This latter is to be sent to the Bit Insertion. Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side.
The multiplexed tributaries are then sent to the B.I. for aggregate frame generation. The aggregate frame contains:
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
33
•
the main signal from the MUX(s)
•
the framed service signal from the service interface
•
the EOC signals for supervision message propagation towards the remote terminal
•
the frame alignment word
•
the bits dedicated to the FEC.
All the synch. signals to perform multiplexing (demultiplexing) and BI (BE) process are achieved from a x0 at 40 MHz. The aggregate frame thus generates is sent to the QAM modulator.
Rx side Refer to Fig.24. At Rx side the Bit extraction separates the main multiplexed signal from the service signal and then after a proper demultiplexing process (opposite to that previously described at the Tx side) sends them to the output interfaces.
8.1.2
Radio interface
This functionality provides the following: •
QAM modemodulation
•
power supply to IDU and ODU
•
telemetry IDU/ODU
•
cable interface
QAM modemodulation – Modulation side See Fig.25 The aggregate signal from the BI undergoes the following process in digital form: •
serial to parallel conversion
•
differential encoding
•
generation of the shaped modulating signals feeding the IF part of the QAM modulator.
This latter comprises: •
recovery low filter to eliminate signal periodicity
•
330 MHz local oscillator
•
a 90° phase shifter to supply two mixers with two in quadrature carriers
The thus obtained 330 MHz QAM modulated carrier is then sent to the cable interface for connection with ODU.
QAM modemodulation – Demodulation side See Fig.25. The 140 MHz modulated carrier from the ODU is reaching the IDU through the cable interface. The connection to the demodulator input is made via a cable equalizer for cable loss compensation. The IF section of the QAM demodulator extracts the I and Q analogue signals then digital converted for the following processing: •
34
clock recovery
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
•
baseband equalisation and filtering
•
bit polarity decision
•
differential decoding
•
parallel to serial conversion to recover the aggregate signal.
The aggregate signal is then sent to a frame alignment circuit and CRC analysis and then to the error corrector to achieve the BER extimate, the PM and HBER/LBER alarms.
Power supply Refer to Fig.25. The –48 V battery voltage feeds the IDU and ODU circuitry. The service voltages for the IDU feeding are achieved through a DC/DC converter for +3.6 V generation and a step down circuit for –5V. Both voltages are protected against overvoltages and overcurrents. The power to the ODU is given by the same battery running through the interconnection cable. A breaker protects the battery against cable failure.
Telemetry IDU/ODU Refer to Fig.19 and Fig.25. The dialogue IDU/ODU is made–up by the main controller and associated peripherals within the ODU. Controls for ODU management and alarm reporting is performed making use of a 388 kbit/s framed signals. The transport along the interconneting cable is performed via two FSK modulated carriers: 17.5 MHz from IDU to ODU; 5.5 MHZ from ODU to IDU.
Cable interface Refer to Fig.25. This circuit permits to communicate to the far ODU through the interconnecting cable. It is mainly made up of a set of filters that: •
combine the 330 MHz, QAM modulated carrier/the 17.5 MHz carrier/the power supply
•
separate the 140 MHz QAM modulated carrier and the 5.5 MHz carrier
8.1.3
Equipment controller
The controller functionality performs the following: •
houses the equipment software for equipment management
•
interfaces the SCT/LCT program through supervision ports
•
receive external alarms and route them to relay s along with the internal alarms generated by the equipment.
The equipment software permits to control and manage all the equipment functionality. It is distributed on two hardware levels: main controller and ODU peripheral controller. The dialogue between main and peripheral controllers is shown in Fig.26.
Main controller The activities executed by the main controller are the following: •
Communication management: it makes use of SNMP as management protocol and IP or IP over OSI as communication protocol stacks. See Fig.27 for details. The interface ports for the equipment management are the following: -
LAN Ethernet 10BaseT
-
USB port used for SCT/LCT connection
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
35
-
EOC embedded within the PDH radio frame for connection to the remote NEs
•
Log–in: the main controller manages the equipment or network / by setting and then controlling the ’s ID and relevant .
•
Database (MIB): validation and storing in a non–volatile memory of the equipment configuration parameters.
•
Equipment configuration: distribution of the parameters stored in the MIB towards the peripheral µPs for their attuation in addition to the controls from not stored in the MIB (i.e. loops, manual forcing etc...).
•
Alarm monitoring: acquisition, filtering and correlation of the alarms gathered from slaved µPs. Local logger and alarm sending to the connected managers: SCT/LCT – NMS5UX. Management of the alarm signalling on the LIM front .
•
Performances: PM management as per Recc. G.828.
•
: the main controller is equipped with two flash memory banks containing the running program (active bank) and the stand–by program (inactive bank). This permits to a new software release to the inactive bank without distributing the traffic. Bank switch enables the new release to be used. activity is based on FTP protocol which s application programs, FPGA configuration, configuration files on main controller inactive bank or directly on the peripheral controllers.
Peripheral controllers The peripheral controllers take place within the ODU and are slaved to main controller with the task of activating controls and alarm reporting of dedicated functionality.
8.2
IDU LOOPS
To control the IDU correct operation a set of local and remote loops are made available. The commands are forwarded by the LCT/SCT program. Loop block diagram is shown by Fig.28.
8.2.1
Tributary loop
Tributary local loop Each input tributary is routed directly to the trib. output upon receiving the command from the LCT. The Tx line transmission is still on.
Tributary remote loop Each tributary directed towards the Rx output line is routed back to the Tx line. The Rx line is still on.
8.2.2
Baseband unit loop
This kind of loop is only local and is activated at BI/BE level. Tx line is still on.
36
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
nx2
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Code converter
Code converter
CK
NRZ
CK
NRZ
MUX 2x2/4x2 8x2/16x2 see Fig. 8.2 through Fig. 8.5 Frame generator
BI: – main traffic – services – EOC – FEC – FAW
to/from main controller
– FSK mod/demod – 388 frame generator/receiver
X0 38.88 MHz
Aggregate frame
17.5 MHz
5.5 MHz
8.2.3 IDU loop
This kind of loop permits to check the full IDU digital operation.
Fig.19 - Line interface block diagram – Tx side
37
Aggregate Ck
Ck 2x2 Mbit/s
MUX proprietary frame
B.I. Tx data Ck
2x2 Mbit/s
DEMUX proprietary frame
B.E. Rx data
Fig.20 - 2x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing
Aggregate Ck 4x2 Mbit/s Ck MUX 2 –>8 G.742 4x2 Mbit/s
B.I. Framed data 8448 Tx Ck
DEMUX 2 –>8 G.742
B.E. Framed data 8448 Rx
Fig.21 - 4x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing
38
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Aggregate Ck 4x2 Mbit/s Ck MUX 2 –>8 G.742
Data
B.I.
4x2 Mbit/s MUX 2 –>8 G.742
4x2 Mbit/s
Framed data 8448 Tx Data
Ck 8448 kHz Tx DEMUX 8 –> 2 G.742
Data
B.E.
4x2 Mbit/s DEMUX 8 –> 2 G.742 Framed data 8448 Rx Fig.22 - 8x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
39
Aggregate Ck 4x2 Mbit/s MUX 2 –>8 G.742
B.I.
4x2 Mbit/s MUX 2 –>8 G.742 Ck 34368 kHz Tx
4x2 Mbit/s MUX 2 –>8 G.742
Framed data 34368 kbit/s
Ck 8448 kHz Tx 4x2 Mbit/s MUX 8–>34 G.751
MUX 2 –>8 G.742 Framed data 8448 kbit/s Tx
Aggregate Ck 4x2 Mbit/s DEMUX 8 –>2 G.742
B.E.
4x2 Mbit/s DEMUX 8 –>2 G.742 Ck 34368 kHz
4x2 Mbit/s DEMUX 8 –>2 G.742
Framed data 34368 kbit/s
Ck 8448 kHz 4x2 Mbit/s MUX 34–>8 G.751
DEMUX 8 –>2 G.742 Framed data 8448 kbit/s Tx
Fig.23 - 16x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing
40
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Fig.24 - Line interface block diagram (Rx side)
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
41
from demodulator side of the radio interface BE See Fig. 8.2 through Fig. 8.5
DEMUX 2/2x2/4x2 8x2/16x2
Code converter
Code converter nx2 Mbit/s
Fig.25 - Radio interface block diagram
42
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
to BE of line interface FEC CRC analysis & aligner
A
DC
DEM QAM (IF part)
DC
Remote power supply
17.5 MHz
5.5 MHz
330 MHz
Overcurrent protect.
– Ck recovery I&Q D – Carrier lock – Equaliz. & filt. – Decision – Diff. decod. – S/P
battery –48 V
to line interface
QAM MOD (IF part)
from line interface
– S/P conversion – diff. encoding – modulating signal generator
– BER extimates – High BER – Low BER – EW
– BER meas. – P.M.
aggregate frame (from BI of line interface)
Cable equaliz.
Step down
I/V protect
–5 V
+3.6 V
Cable interface
EOC
ODU 338 kb/s gen/rec.
388 kbit/s
FSK modem
FSK modem
388 kbit/s generator receiver
Main controller
Peripheral controller
Alarm/ Out In USB LAN
Fig.26 - Main and peripheral controller connection
APPLICATION SOFTWARE Applic./present. session layers
SNMP
Transport layer
T/UDP
IPoverOSI
Routing layer
IP
IS–IS ISO 10589
Data link layer
PPP
PPP
LLC MAC
LAPD Q921
LCC MAC
Physical layer
USB
EOC
Ethernet LAN
EOC
Ethernet LAN
Fig.27 - IP/IPoverOSI protocol stack
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
43
Fig.28 - IDU loopback
44
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Trib. loc. loop
Trib. OUT
Trib. IN Trib. rem. loop DEMUX
MUX
BE
BI
IDU
BB loop
DEM
MOD
IDU loop
IF combiner
9
DESCRIPTION OF THE INDOOR UNIT – ETHERNET INTERFACES
The indoor unit can be provided with Ethernet module. In this way the equipment has both 2 Mbit/s and Ethernet ports, and the bit rate assigned to Ethernet traffic is the nominal capacity of the radio minus enabled tributaries. Description that follows covers Ethernet signal treatment, 2 Mbit/s signal treatment has been described in previous chapter.
9.1
TREATMENT OF ETHERNET SIGNALS
In the place of V11 or (V28 + RS232) board it is possible to have Ethernet Module. In this way the IDU is equipped with the following interfaces: •
3x electrical interface Ethernet 10/100 BaseT IEEE 802.3
•
16 E1 interfaces in ALC
•
32 E1 interfaces in ALC plus
•
total capacity from 4 to 64 Mbit/s (ALC) or from 4 to 105 Mbit/s (ALC plus)
Most important functions are: •
multiplexing of 2 Mbit/s tributaries
•
concatenation of 2 Mbit/s streams
•
LAPS Link Access Procedure SDH (ITU X.86) for concatenated 2 Mbit/s
•
bridge/switch between a local LAN port and the radio LAN port
•
MAC switching
•
MAC address learning
•
MAC address ageing
•
Ethernet interface with autonegotiation 10/100, full duplex, half duplex -
Ethernet interface with Flow Control, Back Pressure, MDI/MDX crossover
•
network segmentation into bridge
•
virtual LAN as per IEEE 802.1q (anyone from 0 to 4095 VID for a maximum of 64 memory location) (see Fig.30)
•
layer 2 QoS, priority management as per IEEE 802.1p (see Fig.30)
•
layer 3 ToS/DS (see Fig.33)
•
packet forwarding
A block diagram of IDU with Ethernet module can be found into Fig.29. In the IDU with Ethernet module there is a "switch" with 3 external ports and 1internal ports. External ports are electrical Ethernet 10/100BaseT interfaces placed on the front . Internal port is connected to radio side stream. Ethernet traffic coming from external ports goes to internal port radio side. The radio side port is connected to streams group of concatenated 2 Mbit/s.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
45
The concatenated 2 Mbit/s are assembled in a protocol called LAPS similar to HDLC. In Tx side Ethernet traffic is packet into a protocol called LAPS similar to HDLC. The resulting stream is divided into the used number of 2 Mbit/s streams. The 2 Mbit/s streams are then multiplexed, together with 2 Mbit/s arriving from front , the resulting stream goes to the modulator, see Fig.29. In Rx the stream arriving from the demodulator is divided into the 2 Mbit/s streams, then the 2 Mbit/s not used into the front 2 Mbit/s are concatenated and sent to Ethernet circuits. Resulting stream, after LAPS protocol control, is sent to switch internal port.
9.1.1
2 Mbit/s tributaries
Tributary channels at 2 Mbit/s (E1), connected to relevant connectors into front , are multiplexed as into standard IDU, see previous chapter. From 0 to 16 tributaries can be selected to be used via SCT/LCT program, all the other available 2 Mbit/s are sent to switch internal port.
9.1.2
Electrical Ethernet interface
The electrical Ethernet/Fast Ethernet interfaces are type IEEE 802.3 10/100BaseT with RJ45 connector. For input or output signals at RJ45 please refer to connection chapter. Cable can be UTP (Unshielded Twisted Pair) or STP (Shielded Twisted Pair) Category 5. Standard coding: •
Ethernet 10 Mbit/s: Manchester
•
Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit/s: MLT–3 ternary
EMC/EMI protection: •
Input and output pins are galvanically isolated through a transformer
•
to reduce EMI every pin at RJ45 connector is terminated even if not used
•
two signal lines are equipped with low capacity secondary protection to sustain residuals of possible electrostatic discharges (ESD).
With LCT/SCT program it is possible to activate autonegotiation (speed/duplex/flow control) on 10/100BaseT interface.
9.1.3
Front LEDs of Ethernet ports
There are 2 Leds for any Ethernet interface: •
DUPLEX: color green, On = full duplex, OFF = half duplex
•
LINK/ACT: color green, ON = link up without activity, OFF = link down, BLINKING = link with activity on Rx and Tx.
9.1.4
Bridge/switch function
A radio link equipped with Ethernet module can operate like a bridge/switch between two or more separated LANs with the following advantags:
46
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
•
to connect two separated LANs at a distance even greater than the maximum limits of 2.5 km (for Ethernet)
•
to connect two LANs via radio within a complex digital network
•
to keep separated the traffic into two LANs towards MAC filtering to get a total traffic greater than traffic in a single LAN.
The bridge realized into Ethernet module is a transparent bridge (IEEE 802.1 part D) into the same Vlan described by VLAN Configuration Table. The bridge works at data link level, Layer 2 of OSI pile, and leave untouched Layer 3. The bridge takes care to sendo traffic from a local LAN, to remote LAN. Routing is only on the basic of Level 2 addresses, sublevel MAC. The operation of bridge is the following: •
when a bridge interface receives a MAC frame, the bridge on the basis of destination address, decides which LAN to send it
•
if destination address is on originating LAN the frame is descarded
•
if destination address is a known address (towards address learning procedure) and is present into local address table the frame is sent only on destintion LAN (MAC switching)
•
otherwise the frame is sent to all ports with the same VLAN ID (flooding).
A bridge is very different from a repeater, which copies slavishly everything that receives from a line on all the others. The bridge, in fact, acquires a frame, analyzes it, reconstruct it and routes it. The bridge compensates also the different speeds of the interfaces, therefore an input can be at 100 Mbit/s and output at 10 Mbit/s. The mechanism is the following: •
from the moment of its activation, the bridge examines all the frames that arrive it from different LANs, and on these basis it builds its routing tables progressively. In fact, every received frame allows the bridge to know on what LAN the sending station is located (MAC address learning).
•
every frame that arrives to the bridge is rebroadcasted:
•
-
if the bridge has the destination address into the routing table, sends the frame only into the corresponding LAN
-
otherwise the frame is sent to all the LANs except the originating (flooding)
-
as soon as the bridge increases its knowledge of different machines, the retransmission becomes more and more selective (and therefore more efficient)
the routing tables are updated every some minutes (programmable), removing addresses not alive in the last period (so, if a machine is moved, within a few minute it is addressed correctly) (MAC address ageing).
The whole process of bridging is restricted to the ports which are of the same Vlan as described into Vlan Configuration Table.
9.1.5
Ethernet Full Duplex function
The first realizations of the Ethernet network were on coaxial cable with the 10Base5 standard. According to this standard Ethernet interfaces (e.g. PC) are connected to the coaxial cable in parallel and are normally in receiving mode. Only one PC, at a certain time, transmits on the cable, the others are receiving, so this is half duplex mode, and only one PC uses the recived message. Then the coaxial cable was progressively replaced by the pairs cable Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) as per 10BaseT standard. Normally there are four pairs into UTP Cat5 cable but two pairs are used with 10BaseT, one for Tx one for Rx. Into 10Base5 and 10BaseT standards, network protocols are the same the difference lays into the electrical interface. UTP cable is connected point to point betwen a hub and a Ethernet interface. Network structure is a star where the server is connected to a hub and from this a UTP cable is laid down for each Ethernet interface starts.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
47
The further step is to replace the hub with a more powerful equipment, e.g. a switch. In this case it is possible to activate transmission on both pairs at the same time, on one twisted pair for one direction, on the other pair for opposite direction. Thus we obtain full duplex transmission on UTP. Activating full duplex transmission it is possible to obtain a theoretical increase of performance of nearly 100%. Full duplex mode can be activated into 10/100BaseT interfaces manually or with autonegotiation 100BaseFx operates always into full duplex mode.
9.1.6
Link Loss Forwarding
Link Loss Forwarding (LLF) is an alarm status of ethernet interface. LLF can be enabled or disabled. If LLF is enabled an US radio alarm condition will generate the alarm status of Ethernet interface blocking any transmission to it. LLF can be enabled for each 3 ports at front . With LLF enabled the equipment connected (routers, switches so on) can be notified that radio link is not available and can temporarerly reroute the traffic.
9.1.7
MDI/MDIX cross–over
The Ethernet electrical interface can be defined by SCT program as MDI or MDIX to cross–over between pairs so that external cross–over cable is not required.
9.1.8
VLAN functionality
LIM Ethernet module works with IEEE 802.1q and 802.1p tag for VLANs and QoS see Fig.30. The virtual LAN (VLAN) are logical separated subnets so that all the stations, into VLAN, seem to be into the same physical LAN segment even if they are geographically separated. The VLAN are used to separate traffic on the same physical LAN too. Station operating on the same physical LAN but on different VLAN work in separated mode thus they do not share broadcast and multicast messages. This results in a reduction of broadcast generated traffic and above all we get more security thanks to network separation. Tag position and structure are shown into Fig.30. Tag is made up with: •
a fixed word of 2 bytes
•
3 bits for priority according 802.1p
•
1 fixed bit
•
12 bits VLAN identifier (VLAN ID) according 802.1q.
Switch crossconnections are based on Vlan Configuration Table where input and output ports or only output ports should be defined for any used VID. Vlan Configuration Table has 64 position for Vlan ID range from 1 to 4095.
9.1.9
Switch organized by port
For each input port it is possible to define where to route the incoming traffic; one or more of the 3 other ports can be Enabled to exit the incoming traffic. It is possible, also, to route back the incoming traffic into
48
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
the same port. This type of connection are monodirectional. For a dibirectional connection between a generic Lan A and Lan B it is necessary to set the connection from Lan A to Lan B and from Lan B to Lan A. The IDU with Ethernet module has 3 physical ports and one internal port, radio side. The internal switch can connect two or more ports together. Then MAC address bridging rules will be applied to this packet. It is possible to select that a packet follows the description of Vlan Configuration Table for its Vlan ID. Another selection is to follow only Vlan Configuration Table. Packets can exit from a port as Unmodified or all Tagged either all Untagged. Unteggad packets will take default tags. For output operations there are 3 selections: •
Unmodified: tagged packets keep their tag. Untagged packets remain untagged
•
Tagged: all the packets will exit tagged, tagged packets keep their tag, untagged packets take Default VID of incoming port.
•
Untagged: all the packets will exit untagged.
9.1.10
Switch organized by VLAN ID
Vlan Configuration Table Vlan Configuration Table defines a list of Vlan ID, For any Vlan ID some ports are of Vlan others are not . Ports of a Vlan are allowed to receive and send packets with that Vlan. Switch dinamically assignes packets to the output port according their VLAN ID. Packets aren’t sent out to that port unless they belong to one of the Vlan of which the port is a member. A port can be a member of a Vlan or many Vlan. A port can be a member from 1 to 64 Vlans but tagged packets are dropped if their input port is not a member of packet’s Vlan. After the control of packet and port Vlan hip MAC address bridging rules will be applied to this packet.
Ingress Filtering Check This is a process to check an incoming packet to compare its Valn ID to input port’s Vlan hip. With Ingress Filtering Check it is possible to permit only to tagged packets to enter the switch. If the port is not member of the Vlan n. XX all the incoming packets with Vlan ID XX will be dropped. There are 3 option into Ingress Filtering Check to manage incoming packets: •
Disable: all Tagged and Untagged packets can transit into the switch following setting of swicth organized by port.
•
Fallback: Untagged frames follow the rules of switch organized by port, Tagged frames with Vlan ID described into the Vlan Configuration Table follow the rules of the table, Tagged frames with Vlan ID not described into the Vlan Configuration Table follow the rules of switch organized by port.
•
Secure: Untagged frames cannot enter the switch, Tagged frames with Vlan ID described into the Vlan Configuration Table follow the rules of the table, Tagged frames with Vlan ID not described into the Vlan Configuration Table cannot enter the switch.
Operations at the input. At the input port the packet is received and a switching decision must be made. The switch analyse the Vlan ID (if present) and decides whether and where to forward the frame. If the received packet is untagged, the switch sends the packet to the port specified into incoming port "Lan per port" settings. If the packet is tagged the switch check the other 3 destination ports to find at least one with the same Vlan ID and put the packet into output port queue. If the Vlan ID is not listed into Vlan Configuration Table the switch sends the packet to the port specified into incoming port "Lan per port" settings.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
49
Then MAC address bridging rules will be applied to this packet. Operations at the output. For each output port there are 3 selections for outgoing packets. •
Disable output port
•
Enable unchanged: tagged packets keep their tag. Untagged packets remain untagged.
•
Enable tagged: all the packets will exit tagged with Vlan ID specified into Vlan Configuration Table, tagged packets keep their tag, untagged packets take Default VID of incoming port.
•
Untagged: all the packets will exit untagged.
9.1.11
Layer 2, Priority function, QoS, 802.1p
Some services as voice overIP and videoconference have some time limits to work properly. A solution is to increase the priority of time sensitive packets. In this case random crowding coming from other services affects the delay of prioritized packets a lot less. Into LIM Ethernet module different priority of incoming packets is managed using Tag defined into IEEE 802.1p (see Fig.30). Every switch output port holds 4 output queues: queue 4 has highest priority, queue 0 has the lowest priority (see Fig.31). Priority can be organized by incoming port or by incoming priority tag: •
Priority by incoming port. For Untagged packets at each input ports it is decided to send the packets to one of the 4 queues of output ports defining which is the Default Priority Queue: Queue = 0, 1, 2, 3. For Tagged packets it is necessary to Disable Priority so they will go in the same queue of Untagged packets.
•
Priority by incoming priority. For tagged packets for each priority tag (3 bits = for 7 priority levels) it is possible to define where to send the packets, into Queue from 0 to 3. Priority must be enable on 802.1p mode only or IpToS mode only (see next paragraph) or first check 802.1p mode and IpToS mode either first check IpToS mode only (see next paragraph) or first check 802.1p mode and IpToS mode either first check IpToS mode and then 808.1q. For untagged packets the priority is defined only by incoming port.
Outgoing packet policy at output ports can be WFQ (Wait Fair Queue) with fixed proportional output policy 8 packets from Queue 3, 4 from Queue 2, 4 from Queue 1, 1 from Queue 0.
Layer 3, Priority function, QoS, IP–V4 ToS (DS) Only for IP packets it is possible to use incoming Layer 3 ToS (see Fig.32) to prioritize incoming packets. The 8 bits available can be read as 7 bits of ToS or 6 bits of DS as shown in Fig.33. According priority defined into ToS/DS the packet is sent into high priority queue low priority queue of output ports. With SCT/LCT program it is possible to select a different output queue for any ToS/DS priority level at each input port.
50
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
2 Mbit/s
10/100BaseT
MUX 16x2 Mbit/s
MUX 16x2 Mbit/s CONCATENATED 2 Mbit/s
10/100BaseT
10/100BaseT
10/100BaseT
0–16x2 Mbit/s
LAPS
Only for 32x2 Mbit/s version
PDH radio
PDH RADIO
Fig.29 - LIM Ethernet 2 Mbit/s block diagram
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
51
Ethernet Layer 2 Header, non–802.1p Destination
Source
Type/Length
Ethernet Layer 2 Header, 802.1p Destination
Source
Tag Control Info
Type/Length
Ethernet Layer 2 Header, 802.1p Tagged frame type interpretation
3 bit priority field 802.1p Canonical
12–bit 802.1q VLAN Identifier
8100 h 2–Bytes
3–Bits
1–Bit
12–Bits
Type = 2 byte (8100) Level 2 priority (802.1p) = 3 bit (value from 0 to 7) Level 2 VLAN (802.1q) = 12 bit (value from 1 to 4095) Canonical form = 1 bit (shows if MAC addresses of current frame are with canonical form): – C = 0 canonical form (MAC with LSB at left) (always into Ethernet 802.3 frames) – C = 1 canonical form (MAC with MSB ay left) (token ring and some FDDI) Fig.30 - Tag control into field
Queue 3
Queue 2 Input port
Queue 1
Output Port
Queue 0
Fig.31 - Output queues
52
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
4
4
8
Version
IHL
TOS
16 Total Length Flags
Total Length TTL
Protocol ID
Fragment Offset
Header Checksum
Source IP Address Destination IP Address Padding
Options Data
Fig.32 - ToS/DS tag position into IP packets
MSB 0
LSB 1
2
3
DS
4
5
6
7
Not used
ToS
Not used
Fig.33 - ToS/DS
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
53
10
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE OUTDOOR UNIT
10.1
GENERAL
The following ODU characteristics are guaranteed for the temperature range from –33° C to +55° C.
10.2
54
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
-
Output power at the antenna side
-
Transceiver tuning range
see Tab.11
-
7 GHz
42 MHz (154 MHz duplex spacing) 56 MHz (161/168/196 MHz duplex spacing) 84 MHz (245 MHz duplex spacing)
-
13 GHz
84 MHz
-
15 GHz
119 MHz
-
18 GHz
330 MHz
-
23 GHz
336 MHz
-
25 GHz/28 GHz
448 MHz
-
38 GHz
560 MHz
-
RF frequency agility
-
Duplex spacing
125 kHz step
-
7 GHz
245/196/168/161/154 MHz
-
8 GHz
311,32 MHz
-
11 GHz
530 MHz
-
13 GHz
266 MHz
-
15 GHz
420/490/728 MHz
-
18 GHz
1010 MHz
-
23 GHz
1008/1232 MHz
-
25 GHz/28 GHz
1008 MHz
-
38 GHz
1260 MHz
-
ATPC dynamic range
40 dB
-
Transmit power attenuation range
40 dB dynamic, 1 dB software adjustable
-
Transmitter shut–down
40 dB
-
Antenna side flange -
7/8 GHz
PBR84 or UBR841
-
13 GHz
UDR120 or UBR140
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
-
15 GHz
UDR140 or UBR140
-
18/23/25 GHz
PBR220 or UBR220
-
28/38 GHz
PBR320 or UBR320
-
AGC dynamic range
from –20 dBm to threshold corresponding to BER10–3
-
Accuracy of Rx level indication (PC reading) –3
±dB in the range –40 dBm to –75 dBm
-
Maximum input level for BER 10
±4 dB in the range –30 dBm to –40 dBm
-
Type of connector at the cable interface side
–20 dBm
-
Signals at the cable interface
"N"
-
QAM modulated carrier
330 MHz (from IDU to ODU) 140 MHz (from ODU to IDU)
-
Telemetry
388 kbit/s
-
Telemetry carriers
17.5 MHz (from IDU to ODU) 5.5 MHz (from ODU to IDU)
-
Available loops
RF loop Tab.11 - Nominal output power ± 1 dB tolerance
GHz
Output power 4QAM
Output power 16QAM
Output power 32QAM
7
+27/30 dBm
+22/26 dBm
+20/n.a. dBm
8
+27/30 dBm
+22/26 dBm
+20/n.a. dBm
11
+25/29 dBm
+20/25 dBm
-
13
+25/29 dBm
+20/25 dBm
+20/n.a. dBm
15
+25/28 dBm
+20/24 dBm
+20/n.a. dBm
18
+20/24 dBm
+15/20 dBm
+15/20 dBm
23
+20/23 dBm
+15/19 dBm
+15/19 dBm
25
+20/23 dBm
+15/19 dBm
+15/19 dBm
28
+19/22 dBm
+14/18 dBm
+14/18 dBm
32
+17/20 dBm
+13/16 dBm
+13/16 dBm
38
+17/20 dBm
+13/16 dBm
+13/16 dBm
Note In 1+1 hot stand–by version the output power decreases by the following values:
1
•
–4 dB ±0.5 dB (balanced hybrid)
•
–1.7/7 dB ±0.3 dB (unbalanced hybrid)
PBR with integrated antenna UBR with separated antenna
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
55
11
DESCRIPTION OF THE OUTDOOR UNIT
11.1
GENERAL
The 1+0 ODU (refer to Fig.34) consists of a two aluminium shell mechanical structure, one shell housing all the ODU circuits, the other forming the covering plate. Two ODU versions are available and are pointed out in the following description if it is necessary. The two ODU versions differ in Tx power and dimensions. On the ODU are accessible: •
the "N" type connector for cable interfacing IDU and ODU
•
the "BNC" connector for connection to a multimeter with the purpose to measure the received field strength
•
a ground bolt.
The 1+1 hot stand–by version (refer to Fig.35) consist of two 1+0 ODUs mechanically secured to a structure housing the hybrid for the antenna connection.
11.2
TRANSMIT SECTION
Refer to block diagram shown in Fig.36. The 330 MHz QAM modulated carrier from the cable interface (see chapter 11.4) is forwarded to a mixer ing through a cable equalizer for cable loss compensation up to 40 dB at 330 MHz. The mixer and the following band filter give rise to a second IF Tx carrier the frequency of which depends on the go/return frequency value. The mixer is of SHP type. The IF Tx frequency is μP controlled. Same happens to Rx IF and RF local oscillators. This latter is common to both Tx and Rx sides. The IF carrier is converted to RF and then amplified making use of a MMIC circuit. The conversion mixer is SSB type with side band selection. The power at the MMIC output can be manually attenuated, 1 dB step. The automatic adjustment is performed making use of an ATPC (see paragraph 11.5 for details). The regulated output power is kept constant against amplifier stage gain variation by a including the AGC. Before reaching the antenna side the RF signal at the output of MMIC es through the following circuits: •
a decoupler plus detector diode to measure the output power
•
a circulator to protect the amplifier stages against possible circuit mismatch.
•
a ON/OFF switch for 1+1 operation
•
an RF band filter for antenna coupling.
An RF coupler plus a detector and a shift oscillator made up the RF loop which is enabled upon receiving a μP control. The RF loop permits the Tx power to return back to receive side thus controlling the total local radio terminal performance.
56
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
11.3
RECEIVE SECTION
The RF signal from the Rx band filter is sent to a low noise amplifier that improves the receiver sensitivity. The following down–converter translates the RF frequency to approximately 765 MHz. The conversion mixer is SSB type. The sideband selection is given through a μP control. A second down converter generates the 140 MHz IF carrier to be sent to the demodulator within the IDU. The level of the IF carrier is kept constant to –5 dBm thank to the IF amplifier stages, AGC controlled, distributed in the IF chain. In addition the AGC gives a measure of the receive RF level. Between two amplifiers a band filter assures the required selectivity to the receiver. The filter is SAW type and the bandwidth depends on the transmitted capacity.
11.4
CABLE INTERFACE
The cable interface permits to interface the cable interconnecting IDU to ODU and viceversa. It receives/transmits the following signals: •
330 MHz (from IDU to ODU)
•
140 MHz (from ODU to IDU)
•
17.5 MHz (from IDU to ODU)
•
5.5 MHz (from ODU to IDU)
•
remote power supply.
The 17.5 MHz and 5.5 MHz FSK modulated carriers, carry the telemetry channel. This latter consists of two 388 kbit/s streams one from IDU to ODU with the information to manage the ODU (RF power, RF frequency, capacity, etc...) while the other, from ODU to IDU, sends back to IDU measurements and alarms of the ODU. The ODU management is made by a μP.
11.5
ATPC OPERATION
The ATPC regulates the RF output power of the local transmitter depending on the value of the RF level at the remote terminal. This value has to be preset from the local terminal as threshold high and low. The difference between the two thresholds must be equal or higher than 3 dB. As soon as the received level crosses the preset threshold level low (see Fig.39) due to the increase of the hop attenuation, a microP at the received side of the remote terminal sends back to the local terminal a control to increase the transmitted power. The maximum ATPC range is 40 dB. If the hop attenuation decreases and the threshold high is crossed then the control sent by the microP causes the output power to decrease. ATPC range can be reduced from the maximum value to 0 dB, by 1 dB step, consequently to a reduction of the output maximum power through an adjusted attenuation.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
57
11.6
1+1 Tx SYSTEM
The two ODUs are coupled to the antenna side via a balanced or unbalanced hybrid. 1+1 Tx switching occurs in the 1+1 hot stand–by 1 antenna or 2 antennas versions as shown in Fig.37 and Fig.38. The transmitter switchover is electromechanic type and consists of two ON/OFF switches within the two ODUs that assure at least 40 dB insulation on the stand–by transmitter. Transmit alarm priority is shown in Tab.12. Tab.12 - Transmit alarm priority Priority
Highest
Lowest
11.7
Levels
Definition
Priority 1
RIM PSU Alarm
Priority 2
Manual forcing
Priority 3
Cable Short Alarm
Priority 3
Cable Open Alarm
Priority 3
Modulator Failure
Priority 3
ODU Unit Failure Alarm
Priority 3
VCO Failure Alarm
Priority 3
IF Unit Alarm
Priority 3
ODU PSU Alarm
Priority 3
Tx Power Low Alarm
Priority 4
Request from remote terminal (both receivers alarmed)
Priority 5
Revertive Tx (branch one preferential)
POWER SUPPLY
The battery voltage is dropped from the cable interface and then sent to a DC/DC converter to generate three stabilized output voltages to be distributed to the ODU circuitry: •
+3.5 V
•
a voltage comprised between +6.2 V and +8.2 V to power amplifiers operating at different frequency bands
•
a –12 V through an inverter circuit.
Each voltage is protected against overcurrent with automatic restart. Protection against overvoltage occurs as soon as the output voltage raises more than 15% respect to the nominal voltage. The restart is automatic.
58
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
”N” ”BNC” Ground bolt Fig.34 - 1+0 ODU version
Fig.35 - 1+1 hot stand–by version
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
59
Fig.36 - ODU block diagram
60
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
PRx meas.
BNC
N type
PRx meas
MOD
330 MHz
x
AGC
–12 V
+6.2 to 8.2 V
+3.5 V
DEM 17.5 MH z
ctrl
variable bw (capacity depending)
388 kbit/s
control
Alarm manag MUX & DEMUX
Cable equaliz.
388 kbit/s
INV
Step up
140 MHz
REC 17.5 MHz
5.5 5.5 MHz MHz
17.5 MHz
Cable interface
–48 V
DC
DC
1 40 MHz
Alm loops ctrl
comm
Rx
unit
IF LO
Tx
T
AGC
approx. 765 MHz
ctrl
IF Tx
PTx att. control 0 to 40 dB
Tx
Rx
RF LO unit
ctrl
LNA
MMIC
RF loop
x
antenna side
Tx side SW control Rx side Antenna side Tx side SW control Rx side
Fig.37 - 1+1 hot stand–by 1 antenna
Tx side SW control
First antenna
Rx side
Tx side SW control
Second antenna
Rx side
Fig.38 - 1+1 hot stand–by 2 antennas
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
61
RemotePRx dBm Local Thresh High
Remote
Rx
Tx PTxactuation
Thresh Low
µP
Rx
Transmission
PRx recording level µP PTx control
Tx
of PTx control
Hop attenuation (dB) LocalPTx dBm PTx max. 20 dB ATPC range
PTx min.
Hop attenuation (dB) Fig.39 - ATPC operation
62
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
12
24/48 VOLT DC/DC CONVERTER D52089
12.1
GENERAL
The 24/48V DC/DC converter D52089 is a unit which converts the voltage of 24 Vdc in –48 Vdc. This unit is housed in a subrack 1 RU unit G52004 with two D52089 units (1+1 version). For 1+0 version the subrack is G52003 with one D52089 unit and the remaining half front has a cover. These subracks have a free air gap for cooling purpose. The DC/DC converter unit D52089 is shown in Fig.40. Fuse 6.3 A
–
Green LED
24Vdc IN
–
+
ON
+
M6,3A 250V
24 Vdc input male 3W3 connector
ALARM 48Vdc OUT 2A
48 Vdc output female 3W3 connector
CM2 connector
Fig.40 - DC/DC converter front coverplate
12.2
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
-
Operational range
-10° ÷ 50° C
-
Storage range
-40° ÷ 80° C
-
Operational humidity
90% max in the range -5° ÷ 30° C
12.3
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
-
Vinput
24 Vdc (20.4 ÷ 28.8 Vdc floating)
-
Voutput
52 Vdc
-
Max current in input
4.5 A
-
Max 24 Vdc consumption
90 W
-
Max 48 Vdc load
75 W
-
Secondary voltage ripple
≤ 200 mVpp
-
Surge current (Inrush current)
ETS 300 132-2
-
Conducted immunity
ETS 300 132-2
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
63
-
Conducted emission
ETS 300 132-2
-
Short duration voltage transient
ETS 300 132-2 (ETR 283)
-
Abnormal service voltage
ETS 300 132-2
-
Voltage changes due to the regulation of power supply
ETS 300 132-2
-
Electromagnetic compatibility
EN 300 086
-
Safety
EN 60950-1
-
Protections against
- input polarity inversion (fuse) - surge input current (fuse) - continuous short circuit at output with automatic recovery
-
Visual indication
ON = green led active on input primary voltage present
-
Alarm (CM2 connector)
with relay on 9 pin male SUB–D connector Alarm off: 8–9 pin open, 7–9 pin closed Alarm on when Vout decreases ≥ 15%: 8–9 pin closed, 7–9 pin open
-
Fuse
6.3 A medium time 250 Volt
Fig.41 shows connection from IDU 1+0 AL compact version to 24/48 V converter with cable F03489. Fig.42 shows connections from IDU 1+1 AL compact version to 24/48 V converter with cables F03489 and F03278. Warning: connect only 24 Vdc to primary input 24 Vdc IN. Warning: power supply from –48 Vdc must be connected directly to ALC IDU.
64
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
AL
Q3
LCT
IN/OUT
Trib. 5–6–7–8
Warning: connect only 24 Vdc to primary input 24 Vdc IN
R
TEST
Trib. 1–2–3–4
6,3A M 250V
Fuse 6.3 A
ON
48V
–
PS
IN 24Vdc
24 Vdc IN –
G52003
F03489
–
AL - MN.00142.E - 009 + +
Fig.41 - 24/48 V DC/DC converter connections to IDU 1+0
65
+
2A OUT 48Vdc
ALARM
AL
TX RX
2
1
Q3
LCT IN/OUT
24Vdc IN
+
+
Trib. 5–6–7–8
Trib. 1–2–3–4
48Vdc 2A OUT
Warning: connect only 24 Vdc to primary input 24 Vdc IN
R
TEST
ON
–
6,3A M 250V
24 Vdc IN – ALARM
Trib. 13–14–15–16
Trib. 9–10–11–12
6,3A M 250V
1
Fuse 6.3 A
F03278
ON
48V1
–
PS2
PS1
24Vdc IN
24 Vdc IN
+
66 –
Fuse 6.3 A
48V2
– +
+
Fig.42 - 24/48 V DC/DC converter connections to IDU 1+1
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
–
2
F03489
+
48Vdc OUT 2A
1
ALARM
2
Section 3. INSTALLATION
13
INSTALLATION AND PROCEDURES FOR ENSURING ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
13.1
GENERAL
The equipment consists of IDU and ODU(s) units and is mechanically made up of a wired 19" subrack (IDU) and a weather proof metallic container (ODU). The two units are shipped together in an appropriate cardboard box. After unpacking, mechanical installation takes place followed by electrical connections as described in the following paragraphs. Different versions of IDUs and ODUs are pointed out in the following procedures if different steps are requested during installation.
13.2
13.2.1
MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
IDU installation
The front side of the IDU mechanical structure is provided with holes at the sides. This allows to fasten the subrack to a 19" rack by means of four M6 screws. If two or more IDUs are to be mounted, leave at least 1/2 rack unit space (22 mm) between two IDUs to avoid overheating problems.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
67
13.3
ELECTRICAL WIRING
The electrical wiring must be done using appropriate cables thus assuring the equipment complies with electromagnetic compatibility standards. The cable terminates to flying connectors which have to be connected to the corresponding connectors on the equipment front. Position and pin–out of the equipment connectors are available in this section. Tab.13 shows the characteristics of the cables to be used and the flying connector types.
Tab.13 - Characteristics of the cables
Battery
Polarised SUB–D 3W3 female connector
Section of each wire ≥ 2.5 mm2
25 pin SUB–D male connector
120 Ohm balanced four symmetric pairs with shield
Coaxial connector 1.0/2.3
75 Ohm unbalanced with shield
9 pin SUB–D female connector with shielded holder
9 conductor cable with double brass sheath type interconductor DB28.25 or equivalent
input/alarm output
68
a
Type of connector terminating the cable
Tributary signals
a.
Type of cable/conductor
Interconnecting points
LCT
USB connector
USB connector
GND
Faston male type
Section area ≥ 6 mm2
For power cable lenght longer than 20 m. a section of 4 mm2 is required.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
13.4
GROUNDING CONNECTION
Fig.43 and annexed legend show how to perform the grounding connections.
Indoor
3
4
3
4
ODU unit 1
5
IDU unit
7
(+) (–)
2
6
Station ground
Local ground
ground rack Legend 1. IDU grounding point, fast–on type. The cross section area of the cable used must be ≥ 4 mm2. The fast–on is available on both sides of the IDU. 2. ODU grounding bolt. The cross section area of the cable used must be ≥ 16 mm2. 3. IDU–ODU interconnection cable type Celflex CUH 1/4" terminated with N–type male connectors at both sides. 4. Grounding kit type Cabel Metal or similar to connect the shield of interconnection cable. 5. Matching cable (tail) terminated with SMA male and N female connectors. 6. Battery grounding point of IDU to be connected to earth by means of a cable with a section area 2.5 mm2. Length ≤ 10 m. 7. Grounding cords connected to a real earth inside the station. The cross section area of the cable must be = 16 mm2. Fig.43 - Grounding connections
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
69
14
ALC CONNECTIONS
14.1
CONNECTOR USE FOR 1+0/1+1 ALC VERSION
connections are performed through connectors on the IDU front modules (see Fig.44). The connectors are the following: •
Trib IN/OUT: 75 or 120 25–pin SUB–D male connector. For SUB–D connector details Fig.44.
•
LCT: USB connector B type "Receptacle". For connector detail see USB standard.
•
IN/OUT: SUB–D male connector. Connector details refer to Tab.19.
•
Q3: RJ45 connector. Connector details refer to Tab.15.
•
50 Ohm connector for interconnection to ODU2.
•
48V: 3 pin SUB–D 3W3 connector for interconnection to battery.
•
V11: optional service interface. Connector details in Tab.16.
•
V.28: optional service interface. Connector details in Tab.17.
•
RS232 PPP: optional management interface. Connector details inTab.18.
Trib. 1–2–3–4
Q3
LCT
Trib. 9–10–11–12
48V1
IN/OUT
48V2 PS1
TX RX TEST R AL
1 2
1
2 –
PS2
+
Trib. 13–14–15–16
+
Trib. 5–6–7–8
1
2
–
Fig.44 - IDU ALC 1+1 (2x2/4x2/8x2/16x2 Mbit/s)
2
70
SMA kind: max torque 0.5 Nm
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
14.2
STANDARD VERSION CONNECTORS Tab.14 - Tributary connector pin–out (male 25 pin SUB–D) Pin
75 Ohm impedancea
Pin
120 Ohm impedance
1
Tributary 1/5/9/13 input (cold wire)
2
Tributary 1/5/9/13 input (hot wire)
2
Tributary 1/5/9/13 input
14
Tributary 1/5/9/13 input (ground)
14
Ground
15
Tributary 1/5/9/13 output (cold wire)
15
Ground
16
Tributary 1/5/9/13 output (hot wire)
16
Tributary 1/5/9/13 output
3
Tributary 1/5/9/13 output (ground)
3
Ground
4
Tributary 2/6/10/14 input (cold wire)
4
Ground
5
Tributary 2/6/10/14 input (hot wire)
5
Tributary 2/6/10/14 input
17
Tributary 2/6/10/14 input (ground)
17
Ground
18
Tributary 2/6/10/14 output (cold wire)
18
Ground
19
Tributary 2/6/10/14 output (hot wire)
19
Tributary 2/6/10/14 output
6
Tributary 2/6/10/14 output (ground)
6
Ground
7
Tributary 3/7/11/15 input (cold wire)
7
Ground
8
Tributary 3/7/11/15 input (hot wire)
8
Tributary 3/7/11/15 input
20
Tributary 3/7/11/15 input (ground)
20
Ground
21
Tributary 3/7/11/15 output (cold wire)
21
Ground
22
Tributary 3/7/11/15 output (hot wire)
22
Tributary 3/7/11/15 output
9
Tributary 3/7/11/15 output (ground)
9
Ground
10
Tributary 4/8/12/16 input (cold wire)
10
Ground
11
Tributary 4/8/12/16 input (hot wire)
11
Tributary 4/8/12/16 input
23
Tributary 4/8/12/16 input (ground)
23
Ground
24
Tributary 4/8/12/16 output (cold wire)
24
Ground
25
Tributary 4/8/12/16 output (hot wire)
25
Tributary 4/8/12/16 output
12
Tributary 4/8/12/16 output (ground)
12
Ground
13
Ground
13
Ground
Ground
a. The 75 Ohm impedance tributary connector pin–out is referred to the flying connectors to be connected to the equipment connectors.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
71
Tab.15 - 100BaseT connector pin–out for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection Pin
Description
1
Tx+
2
Tx-
3
Rx+
4
--
5
--
6
Rx-
7
--
8
--
Tab.16 - Connector pin–out for 64 kbit/s channel – V.11 interface Pin
Description
1
D-V11-Tx
2
D+V11-Tx
3
C-V11-Tx
4
C+V11-Tx
5
D-V11-Rx
6
D+V11-Rx
7
C-V11-Rx
8
C+V11-Rx
Tab.17 - Connector pin–out – V.28 interface
72
Pin
Description
1
RTS
2
TD
3
DTR
4
DSR
5
GND
6
RD
7
CTS
8
DCD
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Tab.18 - Connector pin–out – RS232 PPP interface Pin
Description
1
DCD
2
RD
3
TD
4
DTR
5
GND
6
DSR
7
RTS
8
CTS
9
NC
Tab.19 - in/out connector pin–out Pin
Description
1
relay
2
NA/NC relay
3
input 01
4
input 02
5
GND
6
NC
7
input 03
8
input 04
9
NC
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
73
15
ALC PLUS CONNECTIONS
15.1
CONNECTOR USE FOR 1+0/1+1 ALC PLUS VERSION
connections are performed through connectors on the IDU front modules (see Fig.45 and Fig.46). The connectors are the following: •
Trib IN/OUT: 75 and 120 50-pin female connector: for SCSI connector details Tab.20, Tab.21
•
LCT: USB connector B type receptable. For connector details see USB standard.
•
IN/OUT: SUB-D male connector. Connector details refer to Tab.27
•
Q3/1 and Q3/2: RJ45 connector. Connector details refer to Tab.22
•
50 Ohm SMA connector for interconnection to ODU
•
48V: SUB-D 3 pin connector for interconnection to battery.
•
V11: service interface. Connector details in Tab.26
•
RS232 management interface. Connector details in Tab.23
Trib: 17-24 Q3/2
Q3/1 A
LCT
RS232
Trib: 25-32
IDU ODU R REM TEST
IN/OUT
+
Trib: 9-16
-
+
FAIL Trib: 1-8
-
WAY SIDE CH1
CH2
2Mb/s
Fig.45 - ALC plus 32E1 (1+1)
IN/OUT
IDU ODU
WAY SIDE
R REM
TEST
CH1
CH2
2Mb/s
+
Q3/1 A
RS232
-
+
Q3/2
LCT
-
FAIL Trib: 1-8
Trib: 9-16
Trib: 17-24
Trib: 25-32
FAIL Trib: 33-40
Trib: 41-48
Trib: 49-53
Fig.46 - ALC plus 32E1 + Ethernet (1+1)
74
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Tab.20 - Tributary IN/OUT - 75 Ohm Pin
75 Ohm
48
Ground A
23
Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 input
50
Ground A
25
Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 output
47
Ground A
22
Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 input
45
Ground A
20
Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 output
42
Ground A
17
Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 input
43
Ground A
18
TributaryTributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 output
40
Ground A
15
Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 input
39
Ground A
14
Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 output
36
Ground B
11
Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 input
37
Ground B
12
Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 output
34
Ground B
9
Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 input
33
Ground B
8
Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 output
29
Ground B
4
Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 input
31
Ground B
6
Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 output
28
Ground B
3
Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 input
26
Ground B
1
Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 output
Note: pin 44 with ground A pins, pin 32 with ground B pins. 25
.........................
1
.........................
50
26
Fig.47 - Pin-out Tributary IN/OUT 50 SCSI
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
75
Tab.21 - Tributary IN/OUT - 120 Ohm
76
Pin
120 Ohm
49
Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 input
23
Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 input
44
Ground A
24
Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 output
25
Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 output
44
Ground A
21
Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 input
22
Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 input
44
Ground A
46
Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 output
20
Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 output
44
Ground A
16
Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 input
17
Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 input
44
Ground A
19
Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 output
18
Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 output
44
Ground A
41
Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 input
15
Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 input
44
Ground A
13
Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 output
14
Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 output
44
Ground A
10
Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 input
11
Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 input
32
Ground B
38
Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 output
12
Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 output
32
Ground B
35
Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 input
9
Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 input
32
Ground B
7
Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 output
8
Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 output
32
Ground B
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
5
Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 input
4
Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 input
32
Ground B
30
Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 output
6
Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 output
32
Ground B
27
Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 input
3
Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 input
32
Ground B
2
Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 output
1
Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 output
32
Ground B
Tab.22 - Q3/1 and Q3/2 100BaseT connector pin-out for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection Pin
Description
1
Tx+
2
Tx-
3
Rx+
4
--
5
--
6
Rx-
7
--
8
--
Tab.23 - Connector pin-out RS232 PPP interface
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Pin
Description
1
DCD (IN)
2
RD (IN)
3
TD (OUT)
4
DTR (OUT)
5
GND
6
Not connected
7
RTS (OUT)
8
CTS (IN)
9
Not connected
77
Tab.24 - CH1 connector pin-out for 9600 bit/s synchronous V.24 interface Pin
Description
1
CKTx
2
TD
3
DTR
4
DSR
5
GND
6
RD9600
7
CKRx
8
DCD
Tab.25 - CH1 connector pin-out for 9600 bit/s asynchronous V.24 interface Pin
Description
1
--
2
TxD
3
DTR
4
DSR
5
GND
6
RxD
7
--
8
DCD
Tab.26 - CH2 connector pin-out for 64 kbit/s channel - V.11 interface
78
Pin
Description
1
D-V11-Tx
2
D+V11-Tx
3
C-V11-Tx
4
C+V11-Tx
5
D-V11-Tx
6
D+V11-Tx
7
C-V11-Tx
8
C+V11-Tx
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Tab.27 - IN/OUT connector pin-out
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Pin
Description
1
C relay - branch 1
2
NA/NC relay - branch 1
3
C relay - branch 2
4
NA/NC relay - branch 2
5
input 01
6
input 02
7
input 03
8
input 04
9
Ground
79
16
INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA
16.1
INSTALLATION KIT
Following installation kits are supplied with the equipment depending on different versions: •
•
•
16.2
80
1+0 standard version -
antisliding strip (see Fig.48)
-
ing plate plus 60–114 mm pole fixing bracket and relevant nuts and bolts (see Fig.49)
-
adapting tools and relevant bolts and nuts for 219 mm pole (see Fig.50)
-
antenna side flange, variable as function of RF frequency (see Fig.51)
-
with ODU fast locking mechanism (see Fig.49)
-
flexible waveguide trunk for connection to antenna (optional) (see Fig.49)
-
kit for ground connection making part of ODU
1+0 Band–it version -
band–it strip (see Fig.53)
-
antenna side flange, variable as function of RF frequency (see Fig.51)
-
with ODU fast locking mechanism (see Fig.49)
-
flexible waveguide trunk for connection to antenna (optional) (see Fig.49)
-
kit for ground connection making part of ODU
1+1 version -
antisliding strip (see Fig.48)
-
ing plate plus pole fixing bracket and relevant nuts and bolts (see Fig.49)
-
adapting tools and relevant bolts and nuts for 219 mm pole (see Fig.50)
-
hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism (see Fig.52)
-
flexible waveguide trunk for connection to antenna (optional (see Fig.49)
-
kit for ground connection making part of the two ODUs.
REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)
•
N. 2 13mm torque wrench or spanner
•
N. 1 15 mm torque wrench or spanner
•
N. 1 17 mm torque wrench or spanner
•
N. 1 3 mm Allen wrench
•
N.1 2.5 mm Allen wrench
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
•
N. 1 7 mm torque wrench
•
Fastening tool UIT19 (Band–it mounting kit only)
16.3
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Installation procedure proceeds according to the following steps: •
1+0 standard: installation onto the pole of the ing plate3
•
1+0 Band–it: installation onto the pole of the ing plate
•
1+1: installation onto the pole of the ing plate
•
Installation of the ODU (common to both 1+0 and 1+1 version)
•
ODU grounding
3
1+0 standard – Installation onto the pole of the ing plate Fig.48 - Mount antislide strip around the pole. The position of the plastic blocks depends on the position of the ing plate (see next step) Fig.49 - Adhere the ing plate to the antisliding strip plastic blocks and then secure it to the pole through the fixing bracket for 60–114 mm pole (see Fig.49). Bolts and nuts are available on the ing plate. Tightening torque must be 32 Nm. Warning: As shown in Fig.50 an adapting kit must be used for the 219 mm pole. It consists of an additional plate to enlarge the standard ing plate dimension and relevant U–bolt for 219 mm pole fixing. Fig.51 - Fix the flexible waveguide to the antenna side flange. Four fixing screws are available the dimensions of which depend on the waveguide type. Tighten progressively and alternatively the four screws with the following torque: Tab.28 - Tightening torque Frequencies
Screw
Tool
Torque
from 18 to 38 GHz
Allen screw M3
Allen key 2.5 mm
1 Nm
up to 15 GHz
Allen screw M4
Allen key 3 mm
2 Nm
Fig.51 – Fix the antenna side flange to the with ODU fast locking mechanism. The flange can be mounted horizontally (as shown in Fig.51) or vertically as function of convenience. Fig.52 – Fix the with ODU fast locking mechanism to the ing plate making use of available bolts and nuts. Fig.52 shows three possible positions. Tightening torque must be 18 Nm.
1+0 Band–it In case of 1+0 ODU installation, a band–it pole mounting kit can be used: through slots (see Fig.53) on the ing plate two metallic bands secure the plate on the pole by means of clips (use Band–it fastening tool). Band characteristics are:
3
•
thickness 0.76 mm
•
width 19 mm
•
steel stainless strip AISI 201/304 (3/4")
In case of 219 mm pole, an adapting kit is supplied for the purpose.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
81
•
clips stainless steel AISI 201/304 (3/4")
Fig.51 – Fix the flexible waveguide to the antenna side flange. Four fixing screws are available the dimensions of which depend on the waveguide type. Tighten progressively and alternatively the four screws with the following torque (see Tab.28).
1+1 – Installation onto the pole of the ing plate Fig.48 – Mount antislide strip around the pole. The position of the plastic blocks depends on the position of the ing plate (see next step) Fig.49 – Position the ing plate to the antisliding strip plastic blocks and then secure it to the pole through the fixing bracket for 60–114 mm pole (see Fig.49). Bolts and nuts are available on the ing plate kit. Tightening torque must be 32 Nm. Fig.54 – Secure the hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism to the ing plate using bolt and nuts available on the plate. Tightening torque must be 18 Nm. Remove the plastic cover from the hybrid flange sides. Warning: Do not remove the foil from the hybrid flange sides. Fig.54 – Fix the flexible waveguide to the antenna side flange. Four fixing screws are available the dimensions of which depend on the waveguide type. Tighten progressively and alternatively the four screws with the following torque: Tab.29 - Tightening torque Frequencies
Screw
Tool
Torque
from 18 to 38 GHz
Allen screw M3
Allen key 2.5 mm
1 Nm
fino a 15 GHz
Allen screw M4
Allen key 3 mm
2 Nm
Warning: It is advisable to shape the waveguide flexible trunk, connecting ODU flange with antenna flange as shown in Fig.57. This avoids possible condensate to be channelled towards the ODU flange.
Installation of the ODU 1. Remove the plastic cover from the ODU flange side. Apply silicon grease e.g. type RHODOSIL PATE 4 to the O–ring of Fig.56. Warning: Do not remove the foil from the flange. 2. Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. 3. Position the ODU body close to the with ODU fast locking mechanism and align ODU side flange (see Fig.56) to antenna side flange (see Fig.51 – 1+0 version) or hybrid side flange (see Fig.54 – 1+1 version). Note: For 1+0 version the ODU can assume positions of Fig.55 depending on the polarisation. 4. With respect to the flange alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30° anti–clockwise and then insert the ODU body into the and search for alignment between reference tooth on the (see Fig.51 – 1+0 version or Fig.54 – 1+1 version) and ODU body reference tooth (see detail Fig.56) 5. When alignment is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until "clack" is heard and the ODU rotation stops. 6. Secure ODU body on the by tightening bolts (1) (see Fig.51 – 1+0 version or Fig.54 – 1+1 version). Tightening torque must be 6 Nm. Final assembly of 1+1 version is shown in Fig.57.
16.4
GROUNDING
The ODU must be connected to ground making reference to details of Fig.58.
82
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
7 mm spanner or Phillips screwdriver
Plastic blocks
Antisliding strip
Fig.48 - Antisliding strip
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
83
Use 17 mm wrench (32Nm torque)
ing plate Use 15 mm wrench (32Nm torque)
Fig.49 - 60–114 mm pole ing plate fixing
84
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Fig.50 - Adapting kit for 219 mm pole
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
85
Flexible waveguide trunk or rigid angular waveguide
Antenna side flange
3 mm Allen key
with ODU fast locking mechanism
Reference tooth Reference tooth
1 1 13 mm wrench 6 Nm torque
Position of antenna side flange
Fig.51 - Mounting possible position
86
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
13 mm wrench (18 Nm torque)
Fig.52 - Possible position of the fast locking mechanism
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
87
Fig.53 - Band–it pole mounting
88
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Use 13 mm wrench (18 Nm torque)
Hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism
Reference tooth
Reference tooth
1 1
RT1
RT2
Fig.54 - ing plate
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
89
Vertical
Horizontal
Fig.55 - Position of the ODU body depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always vertical: handle at the left side.
90
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Reference tooth O–ring ODU side flange
”N
”BNC”
Ground bolt Fig.56 - ODU body reference tooth
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
91
Fig.57 - Final ODU assembly of 1+1 version
92
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
13 mm torque wrench (6 Nm torque)
1 2 3 4 5
1. Bolt 2. Spring washer 3. Flat washer 4. Earth cable collar 5. Flat washer Fig.58 - ODU grounding
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
93
17
INSTALLATION ONTO THE WALL OF THE ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA
17.1
INSTALLATION KIT
Following installation kits are supplied with the equipment depending on different versions: •
•
17.2
94
1+0 version -
wall ing plate with additional surface extension plates (see Fig.59)
-
antenna side flange, variable as function of RF frequency (see Fig.60 )
-
with ODU fast locking mechanism (see Fig.60)
-
flexible waveguide trunk for connection to antenna (optional) (see Fig.60)
-
kit for ground connection making part of ODU
1+1 version -
ing plate with additional surface extension tools (see Fig.59)
-
hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism (see Fig.62)
-
flexible waveguide trunk for connection to antenna (optional (see Fig.60)
-
kit for ground connection making part of the two ODUs.
REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)
•
N. 2 13mm torque wrench
•
N. 1 15 mm torque wrench
•
N. 1 17 mm torque wrench
•
N. 1 3 mm Allen wrench
•
N. 1 2.5 mm Allen wrench
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
17.3
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Installation procedure proceeds according to the following steps: •
Version 1+0: installation onto the wall of the ing plate
•
Version 1+1: installation onto the wall of the ing plate
•
Installation of the ODU (common to both 1+0 and 1+1 version)
•
ODU grounding
1+0 version – Installation onto the wall of the ing plate Fig.59 – Fix on the ing plate the two supplied extension plates to increase the wall surface. Fig.59 – Secure the ing plate on the wall using the more suitable screws. Fig.60 – Fix the flexible waveguide to the antenna side flange. Four fixing screws are available the dimensions of which depend on the waveguide type. Tighten progressively and alternatively the four screws with the following torque: Tab.30 - Tightening torque Frequencies
Screw
Tool
Torque
from 18 to 38 GHz
Allen screw M3
Allen key 2.5 mm
1 Nm
up to 15 GHz
Allen screw M4
Allen key 3 mm
2 Nm
Fig.60 – Fix the antenna side flange to the with ODU fast locking mechanism. The flange can be mounted horizontally (as shown in Fig.60) or vertically as function of convenience. Fig.61 – Fix the with ODU fast locking mechanism to the ing plate making use of available bolts and nuts. Fig.61 shows three possible positions. Tightening torque must be 18 Nm.
1+1 version – Installation onto the wall of the ing plate Fig.59 – Fix on the ing plate the two supplied extension plates to increase the wall surface. Fig.59 – Secure the ing plate on the wall using the more suitable screws. Fig.62 – Secure the hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism to the ing plate using bolt and nuts available on the plate. Tightening torque must be 18 Nm. Remove the plastic cover from the hybrid flange sides. Warning: Do not remove the foil from the hybrid flange sides. Fig.62 – Fix the flexible waveguide to the antenna side flange. Four fixing screws are available the dimensions of which depend on the waveguide type. Tighten progressively and alternatively the four screws with the following torque: Tab.31 - Tightening torque Frequencies
Screw
Tool
Torque
from 18 to 38 GHz
Allen screw M3
Allen key 2.5 mm
1 Nm
up to 15 GHz
Allen screw M4
Allen key 3 mm
2 Nm
Warning: It is advisable to shape the waveguide flexible trunk, connecting ODU flange with antenna flange as shown in Fig.65. This avoids possible condensate to be channelled towards the ODU flange.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
95
Installation of the ODU 1. Remove the plastic cover from the ODU flange side. Apply silicon grease e.g. type RHODOSIL PATE 4 to the O–ring of Fig.64. Warning: Do not remove the foil from the flange. 2. Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. 3. Position the ODU body close to the with ODU fast locking mechanism and align ODU side flange (see Fig.64) to antenna side flange ( see Fig.60 – 1+0 version) or hybrid side flange (see Fig.62 – 1+1 version). Note: For 1+0 version the ODU can assume positions of Fig.63 depending on the polarisation. 4. With respect to the flange alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30° anti–clockwise and then insert the ODU body into the and search for alignment between reference tooth on the (see Fig.60 – 1+0 version or Fig.62 – 1+1 version) and ODU body reference tooth (see detail Fig.64) 5. When alignment is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until "clack" is heard and the ODU rotation stops. 6. Secure ODU body on the by tightening bolts (1) (see Fig. Fig.60 – 1+0 version or Fig.62 – 1+1 version). Tightening torque must be 6 Nm. Final assembly of 1+1 version is shown in Fig.65.
17.4
GROUNDING
The ODU must be connected to ground making reference to details of Fig.66.
96
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Extension plate
13 mm wrench
ing plate
M8 bolt and nut
Fig.59 - Wall ing plate
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
97
Flexible waveguide trunk
Antenna side flange
with ODU fast locking mechanism
Reference tooth Reference tooth
1 1 13 mm wrench 6 Nm torque
Position of antenna side flange
Fig.60 - with ODU fast locking mechanism
98
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Fig.61 - Mounting possible positions
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
99
Use 13 mm wrench (18 Nm torque)
Hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism
Reference tooth
Reference tooth
1 1
RT1
RT2
Fig.62 - Hybride with ODU fast locking
100
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Vertical
Horizontal
Fig.63 - Position of the ODU body depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always vertical: handle at the left side.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
101
Reference tooth O–ring ODU side flange
”N
”BNC”
Ground bolt Fig.64 - ODU body reference tooth
102
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Fig.65 - Final ODU assembly of 1+1 version
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
103
1 2 3 4 5
1. Bolt 2. Spring washer 3. Flat washer 4. Earth cable collar 5. Flat washer Fig.66 - ODU grounding
104
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
18
INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA (KIT V52191, V52192)
18.1
FOREWORD
The installation onto the pole of the ODU with integrated antenna concerns both 1+0 and 1+1 versions.
18.2
INSTALLATION KIT
Following installation kits are supplied with the equipment depending on different versions:
1+0 version •
60 to 114 mm pole mounting kit consisting of: -
centering ring and relevant screws (see Fig.67)
-
antislide strip (see Fig.68)
-
pole system and pole fixing brackets (see Fig.69)
-
ODU with O–ring and devices for ground connection
1+1 version •
18.3
pole mounting kit from 60 to 114 mm for 1+1 consisting of: -
centering ring and relevant screws (see Fig.67)
-
antislide strip (see Fig.68)
-
pole system and pole fixing brackets (see Fig.69)
-
hybrid mechanical body (see Fig.78)
-
polarization twist disk (see Fig.79)
-
2 ODUs with O–rings and devices for ground connection.
REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)
•
N.2 13 mm torque wrench
•
N.1 15 mm torque wrench
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
105
•
N.1 17 mm torque wrench
•
N.1 3 mm Allen wrench
•
N.1 2.5 mm Allen wrench
18.4
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Installation procedure proceeds according with the following steps:
1+0 version 1. installation onto the pole of the system 2. installation of the antenna 3. installation of ODU 4. antenna aiming 5. ODU grounding
1+1 version 1. installation onto the pole of the system 2. installation of the antenna 3. installation of hybrid circuit 4. installation of the two ODUs 5. antenna aiming 6. ODU grounding
18.4.1
Installation onto the pole of the system and the antenna
Fig.67 – Set the antenna in such a position as to be able to operate on its rear side. Locate the five threaded holes around antenna flange. Mount centering ring onto antenna flange and tight it with 3 calibrated bolts. Caution: centering ring should be mounted so that the screws do not stick out. Define if the antenna will be mounted with vertical or horizontal polarization. Check that free drain holes stay at bottom side. Mount bolt type M10x30, in position A leaving it loose of 2 cm approx. With horizontal polarization mount bolt type M10x30 in position D, leaving it loose of 2 cm approx. Fig.68 – Mount antislide strip onto the pole. Place blocks as in Fig.68 following antenna aiming direction. Tighten the strip with screwdriver. Fig.69 – Mount pole ing system with relevant pole fixing brackets following antenna aiming direction as indicated by arrow. Antislide strip should result at the center of ing plate. ing system should lean against antislide clamp with the tooth as in Fig.70. Position the antenna in such a way that bolt in position A or D of Fig.67 cross through hole E of Fig.71. Secure the system to the pole by means of the pole fixing brackets and relevant fixing bolts. Fig.72 – Rotate the antenna body until the remainder three antenna holes coincide with the three holes. Secure the antenna to the by thightening the relevant ing through bolts.
106
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
18.4.2
Installation of ODU
1+0 version 1. Apply silicon grease e.g. RHODOSIL PATE 4" to the O–ring (4) of Fig.75 by protecting finger hands with gloves. 2. Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. The ODU handle can assume position of Fig.73 depending on the polarization. 3. Position the ODU body near the system and align ODU side flange to antenna side flange (see Fig.74). With respect to the flange alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30° anti–clockwise and then insert the ODU body into the and search for alignment between reference tooth on the (see Fig.74) and ODU body reference tooth (see detail of Fig.75). 4. When alignment is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until "clack" is heard and the ODU rotation stops. Fig.76 and Fig.77 show ODU housing final position for vertical and horizontal polarization respectively. 5. Secure ODU body on the system by tightening bolts (1) of Fig.74.
1+1 version Fig.78 – Apply silicon grease, type "RHODOSIL PATE 4" to O–rings (1). Insert O–rings (1) and (6) into twist polarization disk (2). Vertical polarization Fix the disk on hybrid flange placing marker (4), on disk, close to V mark. Horizontal polarization Fix the disk on hybrid flange placing reference (4), on disk, close to H mark. Caution: Twist disk has two planes. Take care of position marker (4) on twist disk. The position of marker (4) plane should be in to hybrid like in figure. Tighten progressively and alternatively four screws (7) with four spring washers (8) with the following torque: Tab.32 Frequencies
Screw
Tool
Torque
from 18 to 38 GHz
Allen screw M3
Allen key 2.5 mm
1 Nm
up to 15 GHz
Allen screw M4
Allen key 3 mm
2 Nm
Fig.79 – Fix hybrid to system with four bolts (1) taking care of RT1/RT2 position shown by labels of Fig.79. Tighten progressively and alternatively four bolts (1).
18.4.3
ODU installation
The installation procedure of the two ODUs is the same. 1. Apply silicon grease e.g. RHODOSIL PATE 4" to the O–ring (4) of the Fig.75.9 by protecting finger hands with gloves. 2. Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. For 1+0 the ODU can assume position of Fig.73 depending on the polarisation. For 1+1 the handle ODU position is always placed at the right side (horizontal polarization). 3. Position the ODU body near the system and align ODU side flange to antenna side flange (see Fig.74). With respect to the flange alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30° anti–clockwise and then insert the ODU body into the and search for alignment between reference tooth on the (see Fig.74) and ODU body reference tooth (see detail of Fig.75).
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
107
4. When alignment is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until "clack" is heard and the ODU rotation stops. Fig.76 and Fig.77 show ODU housing final position for vertical and horizontal polarization respectively for 1+0 version. Fig.80 shows ODU housing final position for 1+1 version. 5. Secure ODU body on the system by tightening bolts (1) of Fig.74.
18.5
ANTENNA AIMING
Antenna aiming for 1+0 version and 1+1 version is the same. The antenna aiming devices allow to perform the following adjustments with respect to the starting aiming position: •
Horizontal
± 15° operating on the nut (3) shown in Fig.81, only after having loosen the nuts (7), (8), (9), (10) of Fig.82.
•
Vertical
± 15° operating on vertical adjustment worm screw (2) shown in Fig.81 only after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of Fig.82 and (4) of Fig.81. For adjustment from 0° to +30° extract nut (1) Fig.82 and position it in hole (4), extract nut (2) Fig.82 and position it in hole (6). Operate on vertical adjustment worm screw (2) after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of Fig.82 and (4) of Fig.81. For adjustment from 0° to –30° extract nut (1) of Fig.82 and position it in hole (3), extract nut (2) of Fig.82 and position it in hole (5). Operate on vertical adjustment worm screw (2) after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of Fig.82 and (4) of Fig.81.
For vertical adjustment some markers, every 10°, are available on . The bigger marker gives 0° starting aiming position. Once the optimum aiming position is obtained, tighten firmly the four nuts (1), (2), (11) of Fig.82 and (4) of Fig.81 for vertical adjustment and the four nuts (7), (8), (9), (10) of Fig.82 for horizontal adjustment. Tighten with 15 mm wrench and 32 Nm torque.
18.6
GROUNDING
See Fig.83. On ODU grounding can be connected with the available bolt spring washer and flat washers as shown.
108
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
A
D
D
C
B
C
A
B
Vertical polarization
Horizontal polarization
3 mm Allen key 2,5 Nm torque
2 3
A C
1
B
1. Antenna 2. Calibrated Allen screw 3. Centering ring Fig.67 - Centering ring position
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
109
2
1
1. Steel belt 2. Plastic blocks Fig.68 - Antislide strip
110
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
1
2 Antenna aiming direction
3
15 mm wrench 32 Nm torque
3
3 1 3
3
3 1. Pole fixing brackets 2. Tooth 3. Bolt 4. Pole system Fig.69 - mount on pole
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
111
Antenna aiming direction
1
1. Tooth Fig.70 - ing plate position
E
Fig.71 - E hole
112
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
B
A
C
D 15 mm wrench 32 Nm torque
A, B, C, D: Bolt slots Fig.72 - Antenna installation on pole
Vertical
Horizontal
Fig.73 - Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always horizontal. Handle at the right side. Vertical Horizontal
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
113
1
13 mm wrench 6 Nm torque
H H
H H 1 1 H H
H H
1
H: Reference tooth Fig.74 - system for ODU housing and reference tooth in evidence
114
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Reference tooth O–ring ODU side flange
”N”
”BNC”
Ground bolt Fig.75 - ODU body reference tooth
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
115
30°
Fig.76 - ODU housing final position for vertical polarization
116
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
30°
30°
Fig.77 - ODU housing final position for horizontal polarization
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
117
7 8 1 2 4
6
5
3
1. O–ring 2. Polarization twist disk 3. Hybrid mechanical body 4. Position marker of twist disk 5. Reference label for twist disk 6. O–ring 7. Allen screws 8. Spring washer Fig.78 - Hybrid and twist disk
118
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
1 RT1 2 1 RT2
13 mm wrench 18 Nm torque
1. Bolts 2. Spring washer Fig.79 - Hybrid mount on pole
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
119
Fig.80 - ODU housing final position for 1+1 version
120
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
4
3 Chiave da 13 mm
1 2 Chiave da 13 mm
Chiave da 15 mm Coppia 32 Nm
1. Marker 2. Vertical adjustment 3. Horizontal adjustment 4. Bolt Fig.81 - Vertical and horizontal adjustments
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
121
15 mm wrench 32 Nm torque
15 mm wrench 32 Nm torque
4
11
7
1
8
3
10 9 5
2
6
15 mm wrench 32 Nm torque
15 mm wrench 32 Nm torque
1, 2, 3, 4. Horizontal aiming block bolts 5, 6, 7. Vertical aiming block bolts 8, 11. Threaded hole for vertical aiming up to -30° 9, 10. Threaded hole for vertical aiming up to +30° Fig.82 - Antenna aiming block
122
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
1 2 3 4 5
1. Bolt 2. Spring washer 3. Flat washer 4. Earth cable collar 5. Flat washer Fig.83 - ODU grounding
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
123
19
INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA (KIT V32307, V32308, V32309)
19.1
FOREWORD
The description concerns pole mounting of ODU, in 1+0 and 1+1 version, using following installation kits: -
V32307
for ODU with frequency from 10 to 13 GHz
-
V32308
for ODU with frequency from 15 to 38 GHz
-
V32309
for ODU with frequency from 7 to 8 GHz
Differences regard the dimensions and the presence of the centring ring (see Fig.84): -
V32307
centring ring for antenna flange from 10 to 13 GHz
-
V32308
centring ring for antenna flange from 15 to 38 GHz
-
V32309
no centring ring (and relevant screws).
19.2
INSTALLATION KIT
Following installation kits are supplied with the equipment depending on different versions.
1+0 version •
60 to 129 mm pole mounting kit: -
centring ring and relevant screws
-
pole system plus antenna (already assembled) and pole fixing brackets
-
1+0 ODU and relevant screws
-
ODU with O–ring and devices for ground connection
1+1 version •
124
60 to 129 mm pole mounting kit: -
centring ring and relevant screws
-
pole system plus antenna (already assembled) and pole fixing brackets
-
1+0 ODU
-
hybrid and relevant screws
-
polarization twist disk and relevant screws
-
2 ODUs with O–rings and devices for ground connection.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
19.3
REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)
•
N.1 2.5 mm Allen wrench
•
N.1 3 mm Allen wrench
•
N.1 5 mm Allen wrench
•
N.1 6 mm Allen wrench
•
N.1 13 mm spanner
•
N.2 17 mm spanner.
19.4
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Installation procedure is listed below:
1+0 version 1. antenna polarization 2. installation of the centring ring on the antenna 3. installation of 1+0 ODU 4. installation onto the pole of the assembled structure 5. installation of ODU 6. antenna aiming 7. ODU grounding
1+1 version 1. antenna polarization 2. installation of the centring ring on the antenna 3. installation of 1+0 ODU 4. installation onto the pole of the assembled structure 5. installation of hybrid 6. installation of ODUs 7. antenna aiming 8. ODU grounding.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
125
19.5
19.5.1
1+0 MOUNTING PROCEDURES
Setting antenna polarization
Fig.84 – Set the antenna in such a position to operate on its rear side. Locate the four 2.5 mm Allen screws around the antenna flange. Unscrew them (use 2.5 mm Allen wrench) and position the antenna flange according on: horizontal wave guide → vertical polarization, vertical wave guide → horizontal polarization. Screw again the four Allen screws (torque = 1Nm).
19.5.2
Installation of the centring ring on the antenna
Fig.84 - Set the antenna in such a position to operate on its rear side. Locate the three holes around the antenna flange. Mount the centring ring onto antenna flange and tight it with the 3 Allen screws M4 (use 3mm Allen wrench, torque = 2Nm) .
19.5.3
Installation of 1+0 ODU
Fig.84 - Mount the onto assembled structure (pole system plus antenna) using the four 6 mm Allen screws (use 6 mm Allen wrench, torque = 18Nm). Two of the four screws, diagonally opposed, must be mounted with the two bushes around.
19.5.4
Installation onto the pole of the assembled structure
Fig.84 - Mount the assembled structure on the pole using the two pole fixing brackets and the four 17 mm screws (use 17 mm spanner, torque = 13Nm); the heads of the screws are inserted on the antenna side, the four nuts and the springs between nut and brackets are inserted on bracket side.
19.5.5
Installation of ODU (on 1+0 )
Fig.85 - Apply silicon grease (e.g. RHODOSIL PATE 4") on the O–ring by protecting fingers with gloves. Fig.86 - Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. The handle can assume the positions shown in the figure depending on the polarization. Position the ODU body near the and align the wave guide of the ODU to the Wave guide of the antenna: respect to the position of wave guide alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30° counter–clockwise and then insert the ODU body into the and search for matching between reference tooth on the (see Fig.87) and reference tooth on the ODU body. Fig.88 - When alignment of the references teeth is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until "clack" is heard and rotation is stopped. In figure are shown ODU final position for both polarizations. Fig.87 - When ODU positioning is over, secure ODU body on the by tightening bolts (use 17mm spanner, torque = 6Nm).
126
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
19.5.6
Antenna aiming
Antenna aiming procedure for 1+0 version or 1+1 version is the same. Horizontal aiming: ±5° operating on the 17 mm nut shown in Fig.89 with a 17 mm spanner, only after having loosen the two 17 mm nut on the pivot. Vertical aiming: ±20° operating on the 13 mm nut shown in Fig.89 with a 13 mm spanner, only after having loosen the three 13 mm nut on the pole . Once optimum position is obtained, tighten firmly all the nuts previously loosen.
19.5.7
ODU grounding
ODU grounding is achieved with: •
M8 screw without washers
•
M6 screw with washer
as shown in Fig.90.
19.6
1+1 MOUNTING PROCEDURES
In further page are explained all the mounting step not already discussed in " 1+0 MOUNTING PROCEDURES"
19.6.1
Installation of Hybrid
Fig.91 – The polarization twist disk must be always fixed on hybrid flange. Apply silicon grease (e.g. RHODOSIL PATE 4") on the O–rings by protecting fingers with gloves. Bring the polarization twist disk with the position marker down. Insert the O–ring into polarization twist disk. Vertical polarization: fix the twist disk on hybrid flange placing the marker of the disk towards V mark. Horizontal polarization: fix the twist disk on hybrid flange placing the marker of the disk towards H mark. Tighten progressively and alternatively the four screws and spring washer with following torque: Tab.33 Frequencies
Screw
Tool
Torque
from 18 to 38 GHz
Allen screw M3
Allen key 2.5 mm
1 Nm
up to 15 GHz
Allen screw M4
Allen key 3 mm
2 Nm
Fig.92 - Fix hybrid body to 1+0 with four 13 mm bolts (use 13 mm spanner, torque = 18 Nm), tighten progressively and alternatively the bolts.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
127
19.6.2
Installation of ODUs (on hybrid for 1+1 version)
For both ODUs. Fig.85 – Apply silicon grease e.g. RHODOSIL PATE 4" to the O–ring by protecting fingers with gloves. Fig.86 – Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. The handle can assume the positions shown in the figure depending on the polarization. Position the ODU body near the and align the wave guide of the ODU to the wave guide of the hybrid: respect to the position of wave guide alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30° counter–clockwise and then insert the ODU body into the . For 1+1 system the handle of the ODU is always positioned on the right. The polarization twist disk on the hybrid matches the antenna polarization. Fig.93 – When alignment of the reference teeth is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until "clack" is heard and the rotation stops. In figure are shown ODUs final position. Fig.89 – When ODU positioning is over, secure ODU body on the by tightening bolts (use 17 mm spanner, torque = 6 Nm). Warning: Internal codes (e.g. installation items, antennas, PCB) are here reported only as example. The Manufacturer reserves the right to change them without any previous advice.
128
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Four 13mm screws Centring ring (not present in V32309) Three 3mm Allen screws (not present in V32309)
Antenna
1+0 Two bushes Fig.84 - 1+0 pole mounting
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
129
Reference tooth O–ring ODU wave guide
”N” ”BNC” Ground bolt Fig.85 - ODU body reference tooth
130
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Vertical
Horizontal
Fig.86 - Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always horizontal. Handle at the right side.
3 1 2
1 5 4
4 1 5
1 2 3 1. 6 mm Allen screw 2. Bush (diagonally placed) 3. 17 mm Tightening bolts (max torque = 6 Nm) 4. Reference point for horizontal polarization 5. Reference point for vertical polarization Fig.87 - 1+0
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
131
1+0 ODU with handle on the right: horizontal polarization
1+0 ODU with handle on the right: vertical polarization Fig.88 - ODU housing final position for both polarization
132
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Horizontal aiming: two 17mm block screws
Vertical aiming: three 13mm block screws Pole
17mm nut for horizontal adjustment of antenna
Internal 5mm Allen screw for vertical adjustment of antenna
Fig.89 - Antenna aiming
1 2 3 4 5
1. Bolt 2. Spring washer 3. Flat washer 4. Earth cable collar 5. Flat washer Fig.90 - ODU grounding
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
133
7 8 1 2 4
6
5
3
1. O–ring 2. Polarization twist disk 3. Hybrid mechanical body 4. Position marker of twist disk 5. Reference label for twist disk 6. O–ring 7. Allen screws 8. Spring washer Fig.91 - Hybrid and twist disk
134
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Fig.92 - Hybrid installation
Fig.93 - 1+1 ODUs installation
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
135
20
INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE 4 GHZ ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA (KIT V32323)
20.1
INSTALLATION KIT
1+0 version •
Anti–sliding bracket
•
ODU pole and relevant screws
1+0 version •
Anti–sliding bracket
•
ODU pole and relevant screws
•
hybrid and relevant screws
•
Hybrid–ODU connecting cables
20.2
REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)
•
N.2 13 mm spanner
•
N.1 15 mm spanner
•
N.1 17 mm spanner.
20.3
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Installation procedure is listed below: •
1+0/1+1 version: pole installation of the
•
1+1 version: installation of the hybrid on the
•
installation of the ODU on the
•
ODU grounding and connection of the cables to the hybrid and antenna
1+0/1+1 version: pole installation of the Fig.94 - Install anti–sliding device (1) around the pole. The position of the plastic blocks depends on the position of the (2) and of the relevant hooking pin (3).
136
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Hook the to the plastic blocks by means of the hooking pin. Insert to the four screws (4) in the relevant holes, set the two brackets (5) and clamp them around the pole tightening the four nuts (6) (tightening torque = 32 Nm). Cover the projecting bits of the screws using the relevant red covers (7). The two holes (8) house the two tightening screws of the hybrid (only for 1+1 version).
1+1 version: hybrid installation on the Fig.95 – Set the hybrid (1) on the (2) in such a way that the connectors are downward and that the holes on the lower side of the hybrid match with the corresponding holes (8) of the Fig.94. Insert the two screws (3) (tightening torque = 7.3 Nm) and tighten the hybrid to the .
ODU installation on the Locate the part of the more suitable for the installation of the ODU: both the parts can be used (1+0 version). Fig.95 – Locate the four slots (4) on the (2). Fig.96 – Keeping the knob of the ODU1 downward, partially screw the two screws (2) into the two upper holes of the ODU, on N connector side. Hook the heads of the two screws (2) of the Fig.96 into the slots (4) of the Fig.95. Insert also the remaining screws (2) into the holes (3). Tighten all the four screws (2) (tightening torque = 7.3 Nm). Put the sun–cover (5) over the ODU (1) and fix it to the knob of the ODU by means of the supplied strip. In case of 1+1 version, repeat the whole procedure for the second ODU.
ODU grounding and connection of the cables to hybrid and antenna Fig.97 – Tighten the grounding cable of each ODU by means of grounding bolt (1) (tightening torque = 7.3 Nm) and the relevant washer. For the connection of the RF cable follow the label on the bottom of the hybrid: ODU1 (RT1) is that connected to RIM1 of IDU, ODU 2 (RT2) is that connected to RIM2 of IDU.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
137
7 6
5 2 7 6 3
4
1 5
4
8 4 4 Fig.94 - Pole installation of the
138
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
4 4
1
2
3
Fig.95 - Installation of the hybrid on the pole (only for 1+1 version)
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
139
5
1 3
2
Fig.96 - Installation of the ODU on the
140
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
RT2
1 RT1
1
Fig.97 - ODU grounding and connection of the cables to hybrid and antenna
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
141
142
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Section 4. LINE-UP
21
LINE–UP OF THE RADIO HOP
21.1
LINE–UP OF THE RADIO HOP
The line–up consists of the following steps: •
on site radio terminal installation (perform connections and ODU installation as described in the relevant chapters)
•
equipment switch–on (operate the ON/OFF switch on the IDU front)
•
antenna alignment for maximum received RF signal level
•
network element configuration
•
check measurements.
21.1.1
Antenna alignment and received field measurement
Purpose of antenna alignment is to maximize the RF received signal level. Proceed as follows: •
connect a multimeter to BNC connector on the ODU for AGC measurement
•
adjust antenna pointing as soon as the maximum AGC voltage value is achieved.
The relationship between AGC voltage and received field is shown by Fig.98. The received field level has a tolerance of ±4 dB in the full temperature range.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
143
21.1.2
Network element configuration
A factory default address is assigned to each network element that must normally be reconfigured on site following the network rules. To this purpose it is required to connect the PC, where the SCT/LCT program has been installed, to the network interfaces. This has to be done via USB or Ethernet cable. Warning: the checks that follow require a good knowledge of the program use. The description of each menu and relevant windows are given by the program itself as help on line. Run the program and perform the connection to equipment by choosing from menu "Option" the connection made via USB cable. Perform the to the equipment by entering: •
Equipment IP address4
•
ID (default: SYSTEM)
•
: (default: SIAEMICR)
Proceed to program what above mentioned following this path: •
IP Address: select menu Equipment from the menu bar and then Communication Setup → Port Configuration. Enter the required port addresses in the available communication ports. Press ? for details.
•
Routing Table and Default Gateway: select menu Equipment from the menu bar and then Communication Setup → Routing table: enter the routes or default gateway if necessary. Press ? for details. Warning: the routing policy depends on the routing type: manual IP/OSPF/IS–IS. The relevant routing rules must be normally given by network .
•
Remote Element Table: select menu Tools from menu bar and then Subnetwork Configuration Wizard. Station name and remote element table must be assigned following description of the contextual help on–line (?).
•
Agent IP Address: select menu Equipment and then Properties. Assign the address in accordance to the address of the remote element you want to reach.
21.1.3
Radio checks
It is advisable to perform the following measurements to check the correct operation of the radio hop: •
Transmitted power
•
Received power
•
RF frequency
•
BER measurement
All these checks make use of the SCT/LCT program. •
•
Transmitted power, received RF level, RF frequency -
Run SCT/LCT program and then perform the connection to the equipment you want to check.
-
Make double click on the select equipment until main RADIO PDH–AL window is shown.
-
On top of the window Tx/Rx power and frequency values are displayed. In case of Tx power and frequency setup proceed to Branch 1/2 and Power/Frequencies submenus.
BER measurement -
4
144
Run SCT/LCT program and then perform the connection to the equipment you want to check.
If the connection is made via USB cable, the IP address is automatically achieved.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
-
Make double click on the selected equipment until main RADIO PDH–AL window is shown.
-
On the left side select BER1/2 measure. In alternative it is possible to use the PRBS function if one or 2 Mbit/s line is free.
-
Perform the BER measurement and check that values comply with the requirements.
V 3 2,625 2,25 1,875 1,5 1,125 0,75
dBm
0 –100
–80 –70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 Fig.98 - Detected voltage versus Rf received signal
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
145
22
LINE–UP OF ETHERNET TRAFFIC (FOR IDU WITH ETHERNET MODULE ONLY)
22.1
GENERAL
This paragraph deals with line–up of V12252 Ethernet module with details of SCT/LCT program related only to Ethernet application. Assuming that the radio link is already in service, with correct frequency, output power and correct antenna alignment, the line up procedure for different kinds of connection set up of a radio link AL, equipped with LIM Ethernet/2 Mbit/s module, is hereafter described: 1. Local Lan–1 port to remote Lan–1 port connection LAN per port, see Fig.99 2. Local Lan–1 port to remote Lan–1 port connection with only VLANs 3. 3 to 1 port connections, see Fig.111. Settings here below are intended to be done both into local and remote radio equipment.
22.2
LOCAL LAN–1 PORT TO REMOTE LAN–1 PORT (TRANSPARENT CONNECTION LAN PER PORT)
Settings for Untagged and Tagged Traffic
switch
switch port 1
Lan–1 Lan–2
Lan–1
port 1 Radio
Lan–2
Radio
Lan–3
Lan–3
Nx2 Mbit/s
Nx2 Mbit/s Local
Remote
Fig.99 - Local Lan–1 port to remote Lan–1 port connection The line–up of Ethernet traffic is made with the help of SCT/LCT program. Please refer to Fig.100. First selection is Ethernet throughput and modulation scheme, in this example we select 16 Mbit/s and modulation 16QAM (max throughput and modulation scheme depend on of licence provided by Siae Microelettronica). Select configuration 1+0 or 1+1 according system requirements. Inside LCT, select Tributary window. If 2 Mbit/s tributaries are needed, inside the Tributary window it is possible to activate a 2 Mbit/s input/output on the front . When the activation of required 2 Mbit/s tributaries is completed, all the others 2 Mbit/s streams are automatically used for the Ethernet traffic. For instance with a 8x2 Mbit/s capacity, if we use two 2 Mbit/s the capacity assigned to Ethernet circuits is automatically set to 6x2 = 12 Mbit/s full duplex.
146
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Fig.100 - Selection of Ethernet Throughput See Fig.101 for General settings for the switch. All the used ports must be Enabled, so enable Lan–1 and Internal Port, see Fig.102. The other ports should be disabled. The correct cable crossover arrangement must be selected too (see Fig.102). At the end of Line–up, enable LLF if needed. For Untagged traffic, connections are done with Lan per port selections. Referring to Fig.103 incoming traffic at Lan–1 exits at Internal Port and into Fig.105 incoming traffic at Internal Port exits at Lan–1 port. This connection are done for all Untagged traffic and all Tagged packets with Vlan Id not described into Vlan Configuration Table. If Vlan Configuration Table is blank all Tagged traffic follows the rules of Lan per port. Possible selections of Ingress Filtering Check: 1. Disable 802.1q: no check of Virtual Lan tag is made and all packets follow Lan per port settings 2. Fallback: if Tagged packets have their Vlan Id into Vlan Configuration Table they follow the connection described into the table, otherwise they follow the Lan per port settings as Untagged packets 3. Secure: no Untagged packet transits; only Tagged packets with Vlan Id listed into the table can transit. For all configuration, Disable 802.1 should be selected. With Egress Mode as Unmodified the outgoing packets at Lan–1 port exit Untagged or Tagged exactly as they were Untagged or Tagged at the incoming port.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
147
Link Loss Forwarding Histeresys
Output policy for Tagged packets: Level 2 priority, if used, defined for all the ports for incoming packets already Tagged
Click here for Port mapping and VLAN configuration table Fig.101 - Switch general settings
Fig.102 - Lan–1 interface settings
148
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Fig.103 - Vlan settings for Lan–1
Incoming Untagged packets at Lan–1 are sent into output part queue following this selection. In this example packets are inserted into queue 0.
Fig.104 - Priority setting for Lan–1 and Internal Port
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
149
With Priority disabled no check is done into 802.1p priority Tag. All types of packets go into Default Priority Queue.
Fig.105 - Vlan settings for Internal Port
Fig.106 - Vlan Configuration Table
150
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
22.3
LOCAL LAN–1 PORT TO REMOTE LAN–1 PORT (WITH VLANs)
Settings are done to transfer only Tagged traffic within Vlans. We want that Vlan 701, 702, 710 and 1, 2, 3 can into the radio link and all the other Tagged or Untagged packets should be blocked. The line up of Ethernet module is made with the help of LCT/SCT program. Please refer to Fig.100. First selection is Ethernet throughput and modulation scheme, in this example we select 16 Mbit/s and modulation 16QAM (max throughput and modulation scheme depends on of licence provided by Siae Microelettronica). Select configuration 1+0 or 1+1 according system requirements. Inside LCT, select tributary window. If 2 Mbit/s tributaries are needed, inside the tributary window it is possible to activate a 2 Mbit/s input/output on the front . When the activation of required 2 Mbit/s tributaries is completed, all the others 2 Mbit/s streams are automatically used for the Ethernet traffic. for instance with a 16 Mbit/s capacity if we use two 2 Mbit/s the capacity assigned to ethernet circuits is automatically set to 16– 2x2 = 12 Mbit/s full duplex. See Fig.101 for general settings for the switch. All the used ports must be enabled, so enable Lan–1 and Internal Port, see Fig.102. The other ports should be disabled. The correct Cable crossover arrangement must be selected too. Enable LLF if needed, only at the end of line up. Vlan settings for Lan–1 and Internal Port should be like in Fig.107 with Ingress Filtering Check as Secure and Engress Mode as Tagged. With this setting only Tagged packets with Vlan ID listed into the Vlan Configuration Table can transit. All Untagged packets are blocked at the incoming port and outgoing Tagged packets don’t change. A packet with Vlan ID XX can enter into the switch only if Incoming Port (Ingress port) is a member of the Vlan XX, same packet will exit only from ports (Engress Port) which are of Vlan XX. Vlan hip is described into Vlan Configuration Table. A port can be member of no one, one or more Vlans. See Fig.108 for Vlan Configuration Table settings for our example.
Fig.107 - Virtual Lan input and output settings at Lan–1 port
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
151
Fig.108 - Vlan Configuration Table with some Vlans
Tagged incoming packet can be treated with FIFO policy or on the basis of their 802.1p priority tag and ToS/DS value for IP packets. There are 4 queue at each output port. The decision about to which output queue to send a packet is defined into Ethernet switch window selections for 802.1p tag. Into Ethernet switch window it is possible to select ToS/DS button to open window ToS/DS, in this window each incoming ToS/DS value is associated with an output queue so it is possible to change the priority of the incoming packet. When no info on priority is available, the packet is sent to Default Priority Queue using FIFO policy. Into Lan–1 window select Priority (802.1q), into priority box there are some selections: with "Disable" switch doesn’t look at priority tag; with 802.1p switch looks at Tag 802.1p only; with IpToS for IP packets only switch looks to ToS/DS identifier (into IP frame) only; with 802.1p – IpToS switch looks first to 802.1p tag and secondly to ToS/DS, see Fig.110; with IpToS–802.1p switch looks first to ToS/DS and secondly to Tag 802.1p. Note: with IpToS switch looks to IP packet and ToS/DS doesn’t matter if the packets are tagged with 802.1p or not. In this example incoming tagged are tagged and it is necessary to transfer the packets with no change so they must exit from output ports tagged, see Fig.109 and Fig.110.
152
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Fig.109 - Add a new Vlan ID to Vlan Configuration Table with output tagged
Incoming Untagged packets at Lan–1 are sent into output part queue following this selection. In this example packets are inserted into queue 0.
Fig.110 - Layer 2 and Layer 3 priority management
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
153
22.4
3 TO 1 PORT CONNECTIONS
switch
switch port 1
Lan–1 Lan–2
AL radio
Lan–3
Lan–1
port 1
Lan–2
AL radio
Lan–3 Nx2 Mbit/s
Nx2 Mbit/s
Remote
Local Fig.111 - 3 to 1 port connections
In this example 3 local port must communicate with corresponding remote ports. All the ports share the same radio channel but traffic originated and directed to Lan1 should be kept separated from traffic from Lan2 and Lan3 and viceversa. Lan–1 to Lan–1 connection should transfer tagged packets with Vlan 1, 701, 760 and untagged packets. Unspecified tagged packets must be stopped. Lan–2 and Lan–3 have the same requirements. For all connections IP packets with high priority TOS should transferred at minimum delay.
22.5
3 TO 1 PORT CONNECTIONS, SETTINGS FOR UNTAGGED TRAFFIC
The line–up of Ethernet traffic is made with the help of LCT/SCT. Please refer to Fig.99. First selection is Ethernet throughput and modulation scheme, in this example we select 16 Mbit/s and modulation 16QAM (max throughput and modulation scheme depend on of licence provided by Siae Microelettronica). Select configuration 1+0 or 1+1 according system requirements. Inside LCT, select Tributary window. If 2 Mbit/s tributaries are needed, inside the tributary window it is possible to activate a 2 Mbit/s input/output on the front . When the activation of required 2 Mbit/s tributaries is completed, all the others 2 Mbit/s streams are automatically used for the Ethernet traffic. For instance with a 8x2 Mbit/s capacity if we use two 2 Mbit/s the capacity assigned to Ethernet circuits is automatically set to 6x2 = 12 Mbit/s full duplex. Vlan Configuration Table will be defined in order to group traffic from Lan–1, Lan–2, Lan–3 to Port1. All the used ports must be Enabled. Untagged traffic transits only if the selection for Ingress Filtering Check is disabled at each input port and a separated Vlan for Untagged traffic is set up for each port. See Fig.101, Fig.102, Fig.111, Fig.112 and Fig.113. Each port of the switch must be associated with a different Default VLAN ID in order to maintain the traffic coming from different separated LANs, Lan–1 with default VID 3301, Lan–2 with default VID 3302, Lan–3 with default VID 3303, for Lan–1 see Fig.113 and Fig.114. The correct Cable Crossover arrangement must be selected too.
154
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Fig.112 - Input and output setting for VLANs at Lan–1 port
Fig.113 - Output port properties for VLAN 3301
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
155
Vlan 3301, 3302, 3303 are allowed to exit at Port1 with tags (Tagged). Different default Tag’s allow to keep separate the traffic from Lan1, Lan2 and Lan3 exiting at Port 1. At the remote end the traffic is split and forwarded from Port1 to Lan1, Lan 2 and Lan3 without Tag to preserve the original format.
Default VID assigned by to each port Fig.114 - Typology 3 to 1, Virtual Lan Configuration With the above settings inside the VLAN configuration Table only Untagged traffic is forwarded accross the bridge. The same settings should be done inside the remote equipment. The above example shows the Virtual Lan Configuration Table in case of a link carrying the traffic of 3 independent LAN’s connected to Lan–1, Lan– 2, Lan–3, which is split at the remote end among the outgoing Lan–1, Lan–2, Lan–3 ports, while using a common radio link. To prioritize some IP packets with high ToS/DS value it is possible to open PToS/DS window from Ethernet switch window and select the values of ToS for which the packet is sent to high priority Queue, see Fig.115.
TOS value description
DS value description Packets with AF43 priority level will go into Queue 3 at all ports
AF43 now goes to Queue 3, with this button AF43 will go to Queue 2 Fig.115 - Output Queue selection on the basis of TOS/DS priority
156
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
22.6
3 TO 1 PORT CONNECTIONS, SETTINGS FOR TAGGED AND UNTAGGED TRAFFIC
If we want VLAN with Tag 701, 702 and 703 to transit between Lan–1 and Port–1 it is necessary to define Port 1 and Lan 1 as of VLAN1, 701, 760 (see Fig.116 for VLAN 701 and do the same for VLAN1, 760). The VLAN Configuration Table will look like Fig.117. For Lan–2 and Lan–3 we cannot use the same Vlan if we want to maintain traffic from Lan 1, 2, 3 separated. We must change the number of incoming Vlan for instance of 1, 701, 760 use 2001, 2701, 2760 for Lan– 2 and 3001, 3701, 3760 for Lan–3. Connected equipment to Lan–2 port should be reprogrammed to use Vlan 2001, 2701, 2760. Connected equipment to Lan–3 port should be reprogrammed to use Vlan 3001, 3701, 3760. To prioritize Ip packets with high ToS/DS value it is possible to open PToS/DS window from Ethernet switch window and select the values of ToS for which the packet is sent to high priority Queue 3, see Fig.115. The same should be done inside the remote equipment.
Fig.116 - Output properties of VLAN 701
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
157
Fig.117 - Typology 3 to 1, Virtual Lan Configuration Table with Vlan
22.7
3 TO 1 CONNECTIONS: EXAMPLES OF PRIORITY MANAGEMENT
Example 1: To assign to Lan–1 and Lan–3 low priority and to Lan–2 high priority, while wanting Tagged and Untagged to be treated in a fair manner on each queue do as follow: select Priority Disable for Lan–1, Lan–2 and Lan–3; select Default Priority Queue equal to Queue 0 for lan–1 and Lan–3 (see Fig.104). Select Default Priority Queue equal to Queue 3 for Lan–2 (as in Fig.118). Outgoing Untagged packets will take priority tag defined into input port, in this case 0. Tagged frames keep their tag. Example 2: Wanting tagged frames to be treated according their actual priority and untagged packets with low priority, all inputs should be configured as in Fig.Fig.119. Layer 2 Priority assignment is not modified if inside the second folder of the Lan–X (1, 2, 3) configuration window Untagged Frame Egress Mode = Unmodified is selected as in Fig. Fig.120.
158
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Impostando questa cartella, i pacchetti senza tag arrivati alla Lan–2 sono trasmessi alle Code Porte di output. In questo esempio tutti i pacchetti entranti nella Lan–2 vengono inseriti nella Coda di output 3 delle porte di output. Priorità di Input: quando non è selezionato Disable, le trame con tag sono trasmesse alle code 0,1,2,3 secondo il valore di priorità porta di destinazione; con Disable selezionato per questa porta la commutazione usa la Default Priority Queue per trame con tag e senza tag, e senza modifica reale di tag nelle trame entranti con tag. Fig.118 - Queue selection
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
159
Fig.119 - Management of tagged frames according with their priority tag
160
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Fig.120 - Incoming packets at Lan–1 will exit to other ports unchanged according their incoming status.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
161
162
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Section 5. MAINTENANCE
23
PERIODICAL CHECKS
23.1
GENERAL
Periodical checks are used to check correct operation of the radio equipment without the presence of any alarm condition. The SCT/LCT programs running on the PC are used for the purpose.
23.2
CHECKS TO BE CARRIED OUT
The following checks must be carried out: •
check of the transmitted power;
•
check of the received field strength (the reading must match the value resulting from hop calculations);
•
check of bit error rate and hop performances.
For checking procedures, please refer to SCT/LCT program and relevant help–on line.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
163
24
TROUBLESHOOTING
24.1
GENERAL
The AL equipment consists of the following replaceable parts: •
IDU
•
ODU
Purpose of the troubleshooting is to pinpoint the faulty part and replace it with spare. Warning: the replacement of a faulty IDU with spare causes the spare IDU to be re–programmed. To the purpose refer to chapter 19 for the relevant procedure.
24.2
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE
Troubleshooting starts as soon as one of the following alarm condition: IDU/ODU/REM is switched ON on the IDU from (see Fig.121) or alarm messages are displayed by managers SCT/LCT. Two methods are used to troubleshoot the cause of fault: •
loop facilities
•
alarm message processing using the manager SCT/LCT
24.2.1
Loop facilities
The equipment is provided with different loops that help locate the faulty part. Warning: the majority of loops causes the traffic to be lost. The available loops are the following:
164
•
local tributary loops: usually used to test the cables interfacing the equipment upstreams
•
remote tributary loops: usually used to test the two direction link performance making use of an unused 2 Mbit/s signal.
•
baseband loop: it permits to test the LIM circuits
•
IDU loop: it permits to test the complete IDU (optional)
•
RF loop: it permits to test the complete radio terminal.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
24.2.2
Alarm messages processing
When an alarm condition occurs, the equipment generates a number of alarm messages that appear on the SCT windows ie: log history area and equipment view current alarm. Investigation on the alarm message meaning permits to troubleshoot the faulty module.
Alarm message organisation The alarms (traps) are organized as alarm grouping relevant to a specific functions performed by the equipment. The alarm grouping is available only in the view current alarm submenu. What follows is the list of the alarm grouping: •
COMMON – alarms which are not related to a specific part of the equipment but relevant to the link as EOC radio link alarm or link telemetry fail. If these alarms are ON the link is lost. Investigation must be made on a possible bad propagation or equipment failure. See the condition of the others alarm grouping.
•
LIM – This grouping may generate alarms for the following causes:
•
-
external fault: tributary loss signal
-
LIM failure: i.e. multiplexer/demultiplexer failure or modulator/demodulator failure.
RIM – This grouping may generate alarms for the following causes:
•
-
external fault: demodulator fail alarm and local ODU alarm are generated when the ODU becomes faulty.
-
RIM failure – power supply alarm along with cable short/open alarms or modulator/demodulator alarms are activated.
RT – This grouping may generate alarms for the following causes: -
external fault: Rx power low alarm is generated given by a bad propagation or by a faulty remote terminal.
-
ODU failure: PSU fail alarm or RF VCO alarm or RT IF alarm is activated. If this happens, replace the ODU.
•
UNIT – This grouping generates alarms when one of the units, the equipment consists of, is faulty or does not respond to the controller polling. Replace the faulty unit.
•
CONTROLLER – There is not an alarm message relevant to a controller module failure. An alarm condition causes Led IDU to steady lights up.
Trib. 1–2–3–4
Q3
LCT
48V
IN/OUT
PS TEST R
AL Trib. 5–6–7–8
– +
Fig.121 - IDU front
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
165
25
EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION /SAVE/ . PARAMETER MODIFICATION AND CREATION OF VIRTUAL CONFIGURATIONS.
25.1
SCOPE
This chapter describes the procedure to create configuration files. Equipment configuration files must be used in case of replacing a faulty IDU with a spare. To this purpose it is necessary to , from each network element, equipment configurations and save them on three configuration files. It is advisable to do it upon the first installation. Configuration file on the spare CONTROLLER permits to restore previous operating condition. It is also possible to create virtual configuration without being connected to equipment.
25.2
PROCEDURE
To configure the spare IDU the following must be ed/saved on the file/ed: •
General equipment configuration
•
Addresses and routing table
•
Remote element table
To do it, run the SCT/LCT program (see relevant documentation available on line) until "Subnetwork Craft Terminal" application window is displayed.
25.2.1
General equipment configuration
and save 1. Select Open Configuration Template from Tools menu following this path: Tools → Equipment Configuration Wizard → File → Open Configuration Template. The system will show Template Selection window. 2. Choose from Template Selection window the type of equipment and version (for instance radio PDH AL: 2x2, 4x2, 8x2, 16x2 Mbit/s) from which you want to make the . 3. Press OK. The system will display the Configuration Wizard window referring to the selected type of equipment and version (example: radio PDH AL: 2x2, 4x2, 8x2, 16x2 Mbit/s) 4. Press push button and select Get Current Type Configuration from Equipment. The system will display the Configuration File window. The window will show the equipment list.
166
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
5. Select the equipment you wish to a configuration file from (normally the local equipment) by activating the relevant box. 6. Press OK. The system displays the Communication Status window where is pointed out: -
the operation status: in progress/complete.
-
errors area: where error messages relevant to possible abort of the operation are displayed.
At the end of the operation by pressing OK, the system displays, the ed equipment parameters present into the Configuration Wizard window. 7. Save the ed configuration into a file by selecting Save File As command from File → Save → Save File As. The system will display Save This Config. File. Type the file name into the proper box (with "cfg" extension) and set the path to be used to save the file. 8. Press Save push button to finish.
After having installed the spare IDU proceed as follows: 1. Select Open File from Tools menu following this path: Tools menu → Equipment Configuration Wizard → File → Open → Open File. The system will display Select a Config. File window. 2. Select the wanted file and open it by pushing Open push button. The system will display the file content. 3. Press push button and select Configure Equipment as Current File. 4. Activate the box relevant to the equipment you wish to configuration file to (normally the local equipment) and select Configure Equipment as Current File. 5. Press OK. The system displays the Communication Status window where is pointed out: -
the operation status: in progress/completed
-
errors area: where error messages relevant to possible abort of operation are displayed.
6. Press OK to finish.
25.2.2
Addresses and routing table
and save 1. Select Open Address Configuration Template from Tools menu following this path: Tools menu → Equipment Configuration Wizard → File → Open → Open Address Configuration Template. The system will show the mask of the Address Comfiguration Template. 2. Press push button and select Get Current Type Configuration from Equipment. The system will display the Configuration File window. 3. Select the equipment you wish to a configuration from (normally the local equipment). 4. Press OK. The system displays the Communication Status window where is pointed out: -
the operation status: in progress
-
errors area: where error messages relavant to possible abort of the operation are displayed.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
167
At the end of the operation, the system displays, the equipment parameter present into the Configuration Wizard window. 5. Save the ed configuration into a file by selecting Save File As command from File → Save → Save File As The system will display the Save This Config. File window. Into the proper boxes type the file name (with "cfg" extension) and set the path to be used to save the file. 6. Press Save push button to finish.
1. Select Open File command from Tools menu following this path: Tools Equipment Configuration Wizard → File → Open → Open File. The system will display Select a Config. File window. 2. Select the wanted file and open it by pushing Open push button. The system will display the parameters contained into the file. 3. Press push button and select Configure Equipment as Current File. 4. Activate the box relevant to the equipment you wish to configuration file to (normally the local equipment). 5. Press OK. The system will display Type Selection window. Activate boxes IP port addresses configuration e Routing table . If OSPF facility is enabled, you can only select Standard (IP/Communication/OSPF) Settings. 6. Press OK. The system will show a warning indicating the possibility to procede the or not. 7. Press OK. The system will show the in progress. 8. At the end of the will be shown the file content.
25.2.3
Remote Element Table
and save 1. Select window Subnetwork Configuration Wizard from menu Tools. 2. Select equipment Local from Actual Configuration Area and then press Retrieve. In New configuration area is shown the list of remote equipment included the local. 3. Press Save to file. The system will show window Save remote element configuration file. 4. Save the file with Rel extension and then press Save to finish.
1. Select Subnetwork Configuration Wizard from menu Tool. 2. Press Read from file and then select the desired file (with Rel extension). 3. Press Open push button and then the system will show the file content into the New Configuration Area. 4. Select into the Actual configuration area the equipment you desire to , the list of the remote element included the local. 5. Press Send to send the list.
168
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
26
BACK UP FULL EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION WITHOUT POSSIBILITY OF MODIFYING THE PARAMETERS
26.1
SCOPE
This chapter describes the procedure to back up the full equipment configuration. This allows to recover the original equipment configuration in case of faulty IDU replacement with spare.
26.2
CONFIGURATION
Foreword: it is advisable to the configuration during the first installation. Proceed as follows: 1. Select Equipment Configuration Wizard from menu Tools; Equipment Configuration Wizard window will be displayed. 2. Select and then Backup Full Equipment Configuration; Template Selection window will be displayed. 3. Select the correct equipment template (in case of uncorrected choice the backup will be aborted). 4. Press OK and then select the equipment to be ed from Configuration File window. 5. Press OK and then edit the file name from Save backup as window. 6. Press Save; Equipment Configuration Wizard: Complete Backup window will appear. The window shows dynamically the backup procedure. If everything is OK, at the end of the will appear the word done showing the procedure success. 7. Press OK to finish.
26.3
CONFIGURATION
Once the spare IDU has been installed proceed as follows: 1. Select Equipment Configuration Wizard from menu Tools. Equipment Configuration Wizard window will be displayed. 2. Select and than Restore Full Equipment Configuration from Equipment Configuration Wizard. Select Backup File window will be displayed. 3. Select the wanted backup file with extension .bku and then press Open. Configuration File window will be displayed. 4. Select the equipment to and then press OK; Equipment Configuration Wizard: Complete restore window will be displayed. This window shows dynamically the operation. The word done indicates that has been successfully. 5. Press OK to finish. Warning: In case of EOC alarm proceed to restart the equipment.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
169
170
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Section 6. PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION
27
PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION
27.1
GENERAL
The radio equipment was designed to be easily programmed and supervised. The following tools are implemented to the purpose: •
SCT Subnetwork Craft Terminal + LCT Local Craft Terminal. They are used for remote and local control of a subnetwork consisted of a maximum of 100 ALC radio equipment.
•
NMS5–UX Network Management. It is used for the remote control of an entire network consisted of different SIAE equipment including ALC family radio equipment.
For details refer to relevant documentation. SCT/LCT documentation is available as help on–line.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
171
172
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Section 7. COMPOSITION
28
COMPOSITION OF THE INDOOR UNIT
28.1
GENERAL
The IDU is offered in the following versions: •
ALC IDU
•
ALC plus IDU.
28.2
ALC IDU PART NUMBER
The IDU is available in different versions, each of one identified by a specific part number. This P/N is shown on a label attached on the IDU mechanical structure, top left side.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
173
The P/N consists of seven digits with the following meaning: Tab.34 - P/N meaning Digit
Letter/number
Meaning
1
G
Functional assembly of units completed by a mechanical structure
2
A
AL family
3
I
4 to 7
0069 0073 0076 0078 0079 0080 0081 0084 0085 0086 0087 0088 0089 0090 0091
Indoor installation 16x2 - 75 Ohm - 1+1 16x2 - 75 Ohm - 1+1EOW 16x2 - 75 Ohm - 1+0 16x2 - coax - 1+0 8x2 - 75 - 1+0 8x2 - 120 - 1+0 8x2 - 120 - 1+1 16x2 - 120 - 1+1 8x2 - 75 - 1+1 16x2 - 120 - 1+0 8x2 - 120 - 1+0 EOW 8x2 - 120 - 1+1 EOW 4x2 - 120 - 1+0 V28 4x2 - 120 - 1+1 V28 16x2 - CX - 1+1 Eth
This part number together with unit serial number is printed on a label, SIAE or custom, positioned on unit cover.
28.3
ALC PLUS IDU PART NUMBER
IDU Plus Compact is available in different versions; each of them is identified by a Part Number code. This P/N is shown on a label attached to the IDU mechanical structure, on the left top. P/N code is composed by seven digits with the following meaning: Tab.35 - P/N meaning Digit
Letter/number
Meaning
1
G
Functional assembly of units completed by a mechanical structure
2
A
AL family
3
I
Indoor installation
4 to 7
0118 0119 0120 0121 0127 0128
16E1 16E1 32E1 32E1 32E1 32E1
1+0 1+1 1+0 1+1 1+0 + 3 Ethernet 1+1 + 3 Ethernet
The P/N and serial number of the unit is printed on the label placed on the unit coverplate.
174
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
29
COMPOSITION OF OUTDOOR UNIT
29.1
GENERAL
Two ODUs are available: AL ODU and AS ODU.
29.2
AL ODU
The AL ODU consists of a mechanical structure that houses all the transceiver circuitry. In 1+1 version the connection to the antenna is performed through a ive hybrid. Both transceiver and hybrid are offered in different versions depending on the operating bands, the antenna configuration etc... A label attached on the ODU structure shows the most significant parameters as: •
operating band
•
operating sub–band and sideband
•
part number
•
serial number
•
duplexer frequency
A further label is positioned on the hybrid body and shows the number of each transceiver and type of hybrid, balanced or unbalanced.
29.3
AS ODU
The ODU AS consists of mechanical structure formed by two shells. One shell houses the transceiver module, the other houses the branching module. Both the transceiver and the branching are available in different versions depending on the operating band, the antenna configuration, the channel filters etc..... To the purpose on the branching mechanical structure is available a label showing the ODU most significant parameters and the P/N of the whole unit.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
175
176
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Section 8. LISTS AND ASSISTANCE SERVICE
30
LIST OF FIGURES
Fig.1 - Components electrostatic charge sensitive .............................................................. 10 Fig.2 - Elasticised band .................................................................................................. 10 Fig.3 - Coiled cord ........................................................................................................ 10 Fig.4 - Laser diodes ....................................................................................................... 10 Fig.5 - 1+1 ODU typical configuration with integrated antenna ............................................ 17 Fig.6 - 1+1 IDU typical configuration ............................................................................ 18 Fig.7 - 1+1 equipment block diagram............................................................................... 19 Fig.8 - 1+0 non expandable equipment block diagram........................................................ 20 Fig.9 - IDU ALC 1+0 (2/4/8xE1)...................................................................................... 25 Fig.10 - IDU ALC 1+1 (2/4/8/16xE1) ............................................................................... 25 Fig.11 - IDU ALC 1+1 (up to 16xE1 coax. conn.) + Ethernet ............................................... 25 Fig.12 - IDU ALC plus 1+1 (2/4/5/8/10/16/20/32xE1) ....................................................... 25 Fig.13 - IDU ALC plus 1+1 (2/4/5/8/10/16/20/32xE1) + Ethernet ....................................... 25 Fig.14 - IDU 1+1 (up to 16x2 Mbit/s coax. conn.) + Ethernet module................................... 26 Fig.15 - 1+1 ODU with separated antenna ........................................................................ 26 Fig.16 - 1+0 ODU with integral antenna (pole mounting) .................................................... 27 Fig.17 - 1+1 ODU with integral antenna (pole mounting) .................................................... 27 Fig.18 - 1+1 ODU with separated antenna (wall mounting) ................................................. 28 Fig.19 - Line interface block diagram – Tx side .................................................................. 37 Fig.20 - 2x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing................................................................. 38 Fig.21 - 4x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing................................................................. 38 Fig.22 - 8x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing................................................................. 39
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
177
Fig.23 - 16x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing ............................................................... 40 Fig.24 - Line interface block diagram (Rx side) .................................................................. 41 Fig.25 - Radio interface block diagram ............................................................................. 42 Fig.26 - Main and peripheral controller connection ............................................................. 43 Fig.27 - IP/IPoverOSI protocol stack ................................................................................ 43 Fig.28 - IDU loopback .................................................................................................... 44 Fig.29 - LIM Ethernet 2 Mbit/s block diagram .................................................................... 51 Fig.30 - Tag control into field .......................................................................................... 52 Fig.31 - Output queues .................................................................................................. 52 Fig.32 - ToS/DS tag position into IP packets .................................................................. 53 Fig.33 - ToS/DS......................................................................................................... 53 Fig.34 - 1+0 ODU version............................................................................................... 59 Fig.35 - 1+1 hot stand–by version................................................................................... 59 Fig.36 - ODU block diagram ............................................................................................ 60 Fig.37 - 1+1 hot stand–by 1 antenna ............................................................................... 61 Fig.38 - 1+1 hot stand–by 2 antennas ............................................................................. 61 Fig.39 - ATPC operation ................................................................................................. 62 Fig.40 - DC/DC converter front coverplate ........................................................................ 63 Fig.41 - 24/48 V DC/DC converter connections to IDU 1+0 ................................................. 65 Fig.42 - 24/48 V DC/DC converter connections to IDU 1+1 ................................................. 66 Fig.43 - Grounding connections ....................................................................................... 69 Fig.44 - IDU ALC 1+1 (2x2/4x2/8x2/16x2 Mbit/s) ............................................................. 70 Fig.45 - ALC plus 32E1 (1+1).......................................................................................... 74 Fig.46 - ALC plus 32E1 + Ethernet (1+1).......................................................................... 74 Fig.47 - Pin-out Tributary IN/OUT 50 SCSI........................................................................ 75 Fig.48 - Antisliding strip ................................................................................................. 83 Fig.49 - 60–114 mm pole ing plate fixing ............................................................... 84 Fig.50 - Adapting kit for 219 mm pole .............................................................................. 85 Fig.51 - Mounting possible position .................................................................................. 86 Fig.52 - Possible position of the fast locking mechanism ..................................................... 87 Fig.53 - Band–it pole mounting ....................................................................................... 88 Fig.54 - ing plate................................................................................................ 89 Fig.55 - Position of the ODU body depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always vertical: handle at the left side. .......................................................................... 90 Fig.56 - ODU body reference tooth .................................................................................. 91 Fig.57 - Final ODU assembly of 1+1 version...................................................................... 92 Fig.58 - ODU grounding ................................................................................................. 93 Fig.59 - Wall ing plate ......................................................................................... 97 Fig.60 - with ODU fast locking mechanism ............................................................ 98 Fig.61 - Mounting possible positions................................................................................. 99 Fig.62 - Hybride with ODU fast locking ........................................................................... 100 Fig.63 - Position of the ODU body depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always vertical: handle at the left side. ........................................................................ 101 Fig.64 - ODU body reference tooth ................................................................................ 102
178
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Fig.65 - Final ODU assembly of 1+1 version.................................................................... 103 Fig.66 - ODU grounding ............................................................................................... 104 Fig.67 - Centering ring position ..................................................................................... 109 Fig.68 - Antislide strip................................................................................................. 110 Fig.69 - mount on pole..................................................................................... 111 Fig.70 - ing plate position .................................................................................. 112 Fig.71 - E hole ............................................................................................................ 112 Fig.72 - Antenna installation on pole ................................................................... 113 Fig.73 - Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always horizontal. Handle at the right side. Vertical Horizontal ........................................................................................................ 113 Fig.74 - system for ODU housing and reference tooth in evidence .......................... 114 Fig.75 - ODU body reference tooth ................................................................................ 115 Fig.76 - ODU housing final position for vertical polarization ............................................... 116 Fig.77 - ODU housing final position for horizontal polarization............................................ 117 Fig.78 - Hybrid and twist disk ....................................................................................... 118 Fig.79 - Hybrid mount on pole ........................................................................... 119 Fig.80 - ODU housing final position for 1+1 version ......................................................... 120 Fig.81 - Vertical and horizontal adjustments ................................................................... 121 Fig.82 - Antenna aiming block....................................................................................... 122 Fig.83 - ODU grounding ............................................................................................... 123 Fig.84 - 1+0 pole mounting .......................................................................................... 129 Fig.85 - ODU body reference tooth ................................................................................ 130 Fig.86 - Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always horizontal. Handle at the right side. ................................ 131 Fig.87 - 1+0 ................................................................................................... 131 Fig.88 - ODU housing final position for both polarization ................................................... 132 Fig.89 - Antenna aiming ............................................................................................... 133 Fig.90 - ODU grounding ............................................................................................... 133 Fig.91 - Hybrid and twist disk ....................................................................................... 134 Fig.92 - Hybrid installation............................................................................................ 135 Fig.93 - 1+1 ODUs installation ...................................................................................... 135 Fig.94 - Pole installation of the .......................................................................... 138 Fig.95 - Installation of the hybrid on the pole (only for 1+1 version)....................... 139 Fig.96 - Installation of the ODU on the ................................................................ 140 Fig.97 - ODU grounding and connection of the cables to hybrid and antenna ....................... 141 Fig.98 - Detected voltage versus Rf received signal.......................................................... 145 Fig.99 - Local Lan–1 port to remote Lan–1 port connection ............................................... 146 Fig.100 - Selection of Ethernet Throughput ..................................................................... 147 Fig.101 - Switch general settings................................................................................... 148 Fig.102 - Lan–1 interface settings.................................................................................. 148 Fig.103 - Vlan settings for Lan–1 ................................................................................... 149 Fig.104 - Priority setting for Lan–1 and Internal Port ........................................................ 149 Fig.105 - Vlan settings for Internal Port .......................................................................... 150
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
179
Fig.106 - Vlan Configuration Table ................................................................................. 150 Fig.107 - Virtual Lan input and output settings at Lan–1 port ............................................ 151 Fig.108 - Vlan Configuration Table with some Vlans ......................................................... 152 Fig.109 - Add a new Vlan ID to Vlan Configuration Table with output tagged ....................... 153 Fig.110 - Layer 2 and Layer 3 priority management ......................................................... 153 Fig.111 - 3 to 1 port connections ................................................................................... 154 Fig.112 - Input and output setting for VLANs at Lan–1 port............................................... 155 Fig.113 - Output port properties for VLAN 3301............................................................... 155 Fig.114 - Typology 3 to 1, Virtual Lan Configuration ......................................................... 156 Fig.115 - Output Queue selection on the basis of TOS/DS priority................................... 156 Fig.116 - Output properties of VLAN 701 ........................................................................ 157 Fig.117 - Typology 3 to 1, Virtual Lan Configuration Table with Vlan................................... 158 Fig.118 - Queue selection ............................................................................................. 159 Fig.119 - Management of tagged frames according with their priority tag............................ 160 Fig.120 - Incoming packets at Lan–1 will exit to other ports unchanged according their incoming status. ........................................................................................................................ 161 Fig.121 - IDU front ...................................................................................................... 165
180
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
31
LIST OF TABLES
Tab.1 - Procedure for mouth to mouth resuscitation method ................................................ 9 Tab.2 Signal capacity......................................................................................................22 Tab.3 - Modulation and channel spacing ............................................................................22 Tab.4 - Nominal output power 1 dB tolerance - (1+0 version) ODU AL/ODU AS ......................23 Tab.5 - Guaranteed received threshold in 1+0 configuration (dBm) .......................................23 Tab.6 - Guaranteed received threshold in 1+0 configuration (dBm) .......................................23 Tab.7 - Power consumption (ODU AL/ODU AS) ...................................................................24 Tab.8 - Power supply connector consumption .....................................................................24 Tab.9 - IDU/ODU dimensions ...........................................................................................24 Tab.10 - IDU/ODU weight................................................................................................24 Tab.11 - Nominal output power ± 1 dB tolerance................................................................55 Tab.12 - Transmit alarm priority ......................................................................................58 Tab.13 - Characteristics of the cables ...............................................................................68 Tab.14 - Tributary connector pin–out (male 25 pin SUB–D)..................................................71 Tab.15 - 100BaseT connector pin–out for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection ..........................72 Tab.16 - Connector pin–out for 64 kbit/s channel – V.11 interface ........................................72 Tab.17 - Connector pin–out – V.28 interface .....................................................................72 Tab.18 - Connector pin–out – RS232 PPP interface ............................................................73 Tab.19 - in/out connector pin–out ............................................................................73 Tab.20 - Tributary IN/OUT - 75 Ohm ................................................................................75 Tab.21 - Tributary IN/OUT - 120 Ohm...............................................................................76 Tab.22 - Q3/1 and Q3/2 100BaseT connector pin-out for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection .....77 Tab.23 - Connector pin-out RS232 PPP interface.................................................................77 Tab.24 - CH1 connector pin-out for 9600 bit/s synchronous V.24 interface.............................78 Tab.25 - CH1 connector pin-out for 9600 bit/s asynchronous V.24 interface ...........................78 Tab.26 - CH2 connector pin-out for 64 kbit/s channel - V.11 interface ...................................78 Tab.27 - IN/OUT connector pin-out............................................................................79 Tab.28 - Tightening torque ..............................................................................................81 Tab.29 - Tightening torque ..............................................................................................82 Tab.30 - Tightening torque .............................................................................................95 Tab.31 - Tightening torque ..............................................................................................95 Tab.32 .......................................................................................................................107 Tab.33 .......................................................................................................................127 Tab.34 - P/N meaning .................................................................................................. 174 Tab.35 - P/N meaning .................................................................................................. 174
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
181
182
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
32
ASSISTANCE SERVICE
The assistance service provided by Siae Microelettronica will be in compliance, if stipulated, to what specified in the Agreement of Software Maintenance. To exploit this service, fill in all its parts the Module for the notification of bad SW operation (RQ.00961) and send it to the following address: SIAE Microelettronica S.p.A via Michelangelo Buonarroti, 21 20093 Cologno Monzese Milano - Italy www.siaemic.it Fax + (39) 02 25391585 e-mail [email protected]
32.1
RQ.00961 MODULE
Each RQ916 module can contain at most one signalling. The information required for the signalling of the bad operation. Warning. The compiling of the parts General Information (Siae only), Trouble notified by, Reserved to Siae Department and Validation manager are at charge of the Siae personnel.
Section – Trouble Identification -
SIAE product name. Identifier or SIAE code of the product whose bad operation has been detected.
-
Version. Version of the sw product whose bad operation has been detected
-
Documentation Type. Identifier of the document where the problem has been detected.
-
Revision. Revision of the document where the problem has been detected.
-
Volume N. Number of the volume of the document where the problem has been detected.
-
Page N. Number of the page, into the volume, where the problem has been detected.
-
Typology. Severity of the detected bad operation: -
Critical, if it prevents the use of a main functionality of the product;
-
Important, if it prevents the use of a secondary functionality of the product;
-
Disturbing, if occasionally and in difficultly reproducible conditions, it prevents the use of a main functionality of the product;
-
Minor, if very seldom it prevents the use of a secondary functionality without important consequences;
-
Suggestion, if no functionality of the product is damaged but some aspects (e.g.: interface) can be improved.
-
Recurrent. Possibility (Yes) or not (No) to cause the bad operation after the same sequence of inputs given to the product.
-
Repeatable. Possibility (Yes) or not (No) to reproduce the detected bad operation.
-
Annexes. Possibility (Yes) or not (No) of annexed to the NM and their possible number.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
183
184
-
Title. Title of the bad operation.
-
Description. Clear and concise description of the bad operation, comprehensive of the edge conditions and, when possible and applicable, of the reference to the test (identifier and version of the technical documentation, test identifier).
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
GENERAL INFORMATION (SIAE ONLY) Object Submitted
Software
Documentation
Number
Hardware
Distribution List: Quality Assurance
TROUBLE NOTIFIED BY Siae Operator Name
_______________________________
Date
Customer Report Ref.
_______________________________
Date
_______________________________
Customer Name Reference _______________________________
Tel
_______________________________
Company/Dept.
e-mail
_______________________________
_______________________________
Contract N
_______________________________
Address TROUBLE IDENTIFICATION
SW/FW failures SIAE product name
___________________________________________________
Version
______
Documentation type
___________________________________________________
Revision
______
Volume N.
___________________________________________________
Documentation
Page N. Typology
Critical
Important
Recurrent
Yes
No
Repeatable
Yes
No
Annexes
Yes: N°
No
Disturbing
Minor
Suggestion
Title: Description (including enviranmental conditions):
RESERVED TO SIAE DEPARTMENT Trouble
Accepted_Open Reasons
Rejected Notes Analysis performed by
Date
Expected Closing Date
Date
Approved by
CORRECTIVE ACTION DESCRIPTION
FIXED VALIDATION MANAGER
Executed by MN
Closed Open
Verified by
Date
Notes
Quality Record Module TROUBLE REPORT Siae Microelettronica all rights reserved.
Issued by Terzo L.
Approved by Gaviraghi S. Document Ref. RQ.00961
Date 24/09/02
Page 1/1 Rev/Ver 003
manual
MN.00142.E - 009 Volume 1/1
The information contained in this handbook is subject to change without notice. Property of Siae Microelettronica S.p.A. All rights reserved according to the law and according to the international regulations. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, without written permission from Siae Microelettronica S.p.A. Unless otherwise specified, reference to a Company, name, data and address produced on the screen displayed is purely indicative aiming at illustrating the use of the product. MS-DOS®, MS Windows® are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation HP®, HP OpenView NNM and HP–UX are Hewlett Packard Company ed trademarks. UNIX is a UNIX System Laboratories ed trademark. Oracle® is a Oracle Corporation ed trademark. Linux term is a trademark ed by Linus Torvalds, the original author of the Linux operating system. Linux is freely distributed according the GNU General Public License (GPL). Other products cited here in are constructor ed trademarks.
Components
Section 1. GUIDE
7
1
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY ............................................................................... 7
2
FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND SAFETY RULES .......................................... 8 2.1
FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK ..................................................................... 8 2.1.1 Artificial respiration .................................................................................. 8 2.1.2 Treatment of burns .................................................................................. 8
2.2 3
SAFETY RULES .................................................................................................10
PURPOSE AND STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL ............................................................11 3.1
PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL .................................................................................11
3.2
AUDIENCE BASIC KNOWLEDGE ..........................................................................11
3.3
STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL .............................................................................11
Section 2. DESCRIPTIONS AND SPECIFICATION
13
4
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS.........................................................................................13
5
SYSTEM PRESENTATION ..........................................................................................15 5.1
RADIO SYSTEM OVERVIEW ................................................................................15 5.1.1 General .................................................................................................15
5.2
COMPLIANCE WITH INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS ................................................15
5.3
APPLICATIONS .................................................................................................15
5.4
SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE ....................................................................................16 5.4.1 IDU.......................................................................................................16 5.4.2 ODU......................................................................................................16
5.5
MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS ....................................................................................17 5.5.1 Management ports ..................................................................................17 5.5.2 Protocols ...............................................................................................17
6
EQUIPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS...............................................................21 6.1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION ...............................................................................21
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
1
7
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE INDOOR UNIT ...............................................................29 7.1 7.2
GENERAL.........................................................................................................29 TRAFFIC INTERFACE .........................................................................................29 7.2.1 2 Mbit/s Interface ...................................................................................29 7.2.2 Ethernet interface (optional).....................................................................30
7.3
SERVICE CHANNEL INTERFACE...........................................................................30 7.3.1
V.28 low speed synchronous/asynchronous data ........................................30
7.3.2 Alarm interface.......................................................................................30 7.3.3 64 kbit/s contra–directional interface V.11 (optional) ...................................30 7.3.4 Network Management Interface ................................................................31 7.4
8
MODULATOR/DEMODULATOR .............................................................................31
7.5
CABLE INTERFACE ............................................................................................32
7.6
AVAILABLE LOOPS ............................................................................................32
DESCRIPTION OF THE INDOOR UNIT – PDH INTERFACES ........................................33 8.1
1+0/1+1 IDU...................................................................................................33 8.1.1 Line interface .........................................................................................33 8.1.2 Radio interface .......................................................................................34 8.1.3 Equipment controller ...............................................................................35
8.2
IDU LOOPS ......................................................................................................36 8.2.1 Tributary loop........................................................................................36 8.2.2 Baseband unit loop .................................................................................36 8.2.3
9
IDU loop ...............................................................................................37
DESCRIPTION OF THE INDOOR UNIT – ETHERNET INTERFACES ..............................45 9.1
TREATMENT OF ETHERNET SIGNALS ...................................................................45 9.1.1 2 Mbit/s tributaries..................................................................................46 9.1.2
Electrical Ethernet interface.....................................................................46
9.1.3 Front LEDs of Ethernet ports ............................................................46 9.1.4 Bridge/switch function .............................................................................46 9.1.5 Ethernet Full Duplex function....................................................................47 9.1.6 Link Loss Forwarding ...............................................................................48 9.1.7 MDI/MDIX cross–over..............................................................................48 9.1.8 VLAN functionality...................................................................................48 9.1.9 Switch organized by port .........................................................................48 9.1.10 Switch organized by VLAN ID ...................................................................49 9.1.11 Layer 2, Priority function, QoS, 802.1p ......................................................50 10 CHARACTERISTICS OF THE OUTDOOR UNIT .............................................................54 10.1
GENERAL.........................................................................................................54
10.2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION ...............................................................................54
11 DESCRIPTION OF THE OUTDOOR UNIT ....................................................................56 11.1
GENERAL.........................................................................................................56
11.2
TRANSMIT SECTION..........................................................................................56
11.3
RECEIVE SECTION ............................................................................................57
11.4
CABLE INTERFACE ............................................................................................57
11.5
ATPC OPERATION .............................................................................................57
11.6
1+1 Tx SYSTEM ...............................................................................................58
11.7
POWER SUPPLY ................................................................................................58
12 24/48 VOLT DC/DC CONVERTER D52089 .................................................................63
2
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
12.1
GENERAL.........................................................................................................63
12.2
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ..........................................................................63
12.3
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS .........................................................................63
Section 3. INSTALLATION
67
13 INSTALLATION AND PROCEDURES FOR ENSURING ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY ......................................................................................................67 13.1
GENERAL.........................................................................................................67
13.2
MECHANICAL INSTALLATION..............................................................................67 13.2.1 IDU installation.......................................................................................67
13.3
ELECTRICAL WIRING.........................................................................................68
13.4
GROUNDING CONNECTION ................................................................................69
14 ALC CONNECTIONS .........................................................................................70 14.1
CONNECTOR USE FOR 1+0/1+1 ALC VERSION .....................................................70
14.2
STANDARD VERSION CONNECTORS ....................................................................71
15 ALC PLUS CONNECTIONS ................................................................................74 15.1
CONNECTOR USE FOR 1+0/1+1 ALC PLUS VERSION .............................................74
16 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA .............80 16.1
INSTALLATION KIT ...........................................................................................80
16.2
REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) .............................................80
16.3
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ...............................................................................81
16.4
GROUNDING ....................................................................................................82
17 INSTALLATION ONTO THE WALL OF THE ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA.............94 17.1
INSTALLATION KIT ...........................................................................................94
17.2
REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) .............................................94
17.3
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ..............................................................................95
17.4
GROUNDING ....................................................................................................96
18 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA (KIT V52191, V52192)...........................................................................................105 18.1
FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 105
18.2
INSTALLATION KIT ......................................................................................... 105
18.3
REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 105
18.4
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 106 18.4.1 Installation onto the pole of the system and the antenna ................ 106 18.4.2 Installation of ODU................................................................................ 107 18.4.3 ODU installation.................................................................................... 107
18.5
ANTENNA AIMING........................................................................................... 108
18.6
GROUNDING .................................................................................................. 108
19 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA (KIT V32307, V32308, V32309) .............................................................................124 19.1
FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 124
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
3
19.2
INSTALLATION KIT ......................................................................................... 124
19.3
REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 125
19.4
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 125
19.5
1+0 MOUNTING PROCEDURES ......................................................................... 126 19.5.1 Setting antenna polarization ................................................................... 126 19.5.2 Installation of the centring ring on the antenna ......................................... 126 19.5.3 Installation of 1+0 ODU ............................................................. 126 19.5.4 Installation onto the pole of the assembled structure ................................. 126 19.5.5 Installation of ODU (on 1+0 )....................................................... 126 19.5.6 Antenna aiming .................................................................................... 127 19.5.7 ODU grounding..................................................................................... 127
19.6
1+1 MOUNTING PROCEDURES ......................................................................... 127 19.6.1 Installation of Hybrid ............................................................................. 127 19.6.2 Installation of ODUs (on hybrid for 1+1 version) ....................................... 128
20 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE 4 GHz ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA (KIT V32323).........................................................................................................136 20.1
INSTALLATION KIT ......................................................................................... 136
20.2
REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 136
20.3
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 136
Section 4. LINE-UP
143
21 LINE–UP OF THE RADIO HOP .................................................................................143 21.1
LINE–UP OF THE RADIO HOP............................................................................ 143 21.1.1 Antenna alignment and received field measurement .................................. 143 21.1.2 Network element configuration ............................................................... 144 21.1.3 Radio checks ........................................................................................ 144
22 LINE–UP OF ETHERNET TRAFFIC (FOR IDU WITH ETHERNET MODULE ONLY) ........146 22.1
GENERAL....................................................................................................... 146
22.2
LOCAL LAN–1 PORT TO REMOTE LAN–1 PORT (TRANSPARENT CONNECTION LAN PER PORT)..................................................................................................... 146
22.3
LOCAL LAN–1 PORT TO REMOTE LAN–1 PORT (WITH VLANs) ................................ 151
22.4
3 TO 1 PORT CONNECTIONS ............................................................................ 154
22.5
3 TO 1 PORT CONNECTIONS, SETTINGS FOR UNTAGGED TRAFFIC ........................ 154
22.6
3 TO 1 PORT CONNECTIONS, SETTINGS FOR TAGGED AND UNTAGGED TRAFFIC .... 157
22.7
3 TO 1 CONNECTIONS: EXAMPLES OF PRIORITY MANAGEMENT ............................ 158
Section 5. MAINTENANCE
163
23 PERIODICAL CHECKS .............................................................................................163 23.1
4
GENERAL....................................................................................................... 163
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
23.2
CHECKS TO BE CARRIED OUT .......................................................................... 163
24 TROUBLESHOOTING...............................................................................................164 24.1 24.2
GENERAL....................................................................................................... 164 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE ..................................................................... 164 24.2.1 Loop facilities ....................................................................................... 164 24.2.2 Alarm messages processing.................................................................... 165
25 EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION /SAVE/. PARAMETER MODIFICATION AND CREATION OF VIRTUAL CONFIGURATIONS. ..........................166 25.1
SCOPE .......................................................................................................... 166
25.2
PROCEDURE................................................................................................... 166 25.2.1 General equipment configuration............................................................ 166 25.2.2 Addresses and routing table ................................................................... 167 25.2.3 Remote Element Table........................................................................... 168
26 BACK UP FULL EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION WITHOUT POSSIBILITY OF MODIFYING THE PARAMETERS .................................................................................................169 26.1
SCOPE .......................................................................................................... 169
26.2
CONFIGURATION ............................................................................... 169
26.3
CONFIGURATION .......................................................................... 169
Section 6. PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION
171
27 PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION .......................................................................171 27.1
GENERAL....................................................................................................... 171
Section 7. COMPOSITION
173
28 COMPOSITION OF THE INDOOR UNIT ....................................................................173 28.1
GENERAL....................................................................................................... 173
28.2
ALC IDU PART NUMBER ................................................................................... 173
28.3
ALC PLUS IDU PART NUMBER ........................................................................... 174
29 COMPOSITION OF OUTDOOR UNIT.........................................................................175 29.1
GENERAL....................................................................................................... 175
29.2
AL ODU ......................................................................................................... 175
29.3
AS ODU......................................................................................................... 175
Section 8.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
5
LISTS AND ASSISTANCE SERVICE
177
30 LIST OF FIGURES ...................................................................................................177 31 LIST OF TABLES .....................................................................................................181 32 ASSISTANCE SERVICE............................................................................................183 32.1
6
RQ.00961 MODULE ......................................................................................... 183
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Section 1. GUIDE
1
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
SIAE Microelettronica S.p.A. declares that the products: •
Digital radio relay system
AL7
•
Digital radio relay system
AL8
•
Digital radio relay system
AL11
•
Digital radio relay system
AL13
•
Digital radio relay system
AL15
•
Digital radio relay system
AL18
•
Digital radio relay system
AL23
•
Digital radio relay system
AL25
•
Digital radio relay system
AL28
•
Digital radio relay system
AL38
comply with the essential requirements of article 3 of the R&TTE Directive (1999/05/EC) and therefore is marked CE. The following standards apply: •
EN 60950 200 "Safety of information technology equipment".
•
EN 301 489-4 V.1.3.1 (2002-8): "Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and services; Part 4. Specific conditions for fixed radio links and ancillary equipment and services"
•
ETSI EN 301 751 V.1.1. (2002-12): "Fixed Radio Systems; Point-to point equipment and antennas; generic harmonized standard for point-to-point digital fixed radio systems and antennas covering the essential requirements under article 3.2 of the 1999/5/EC Directive".
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
7
2
FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND SAFETY RULES
2.1
FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK
Do not touch the patient with bare hands until the circuit has been opened. Open the circuit by switching off the line switches. If that is not possible protect yourself with dry material and free the patient from the conductor.
2.1.1
Artificial respiration
It is important to start mouth resuscitation at once and to call a doctor immediately. Suggested procedure for mouth to mouth resuscitation method is described in the Tab.1.
2.1.2
Treatment of burns
This treatment should be used after the patient has regained consciousness. It can also be employed while artificial respiration is being applied (in this case there should be at least two persons present). Warning
8
•
Do not attempt to remove clothing from burnt sections
•
Apply dry gauze on the burns
•
Do not apply ointments or other oily substances.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Tab.1 - Procedure for mouth to mouth resuscitation method Step
Description
1
Lay the patient on his back with his arms parallel to the body. If the patient is laying on an inclined plane, make sure that his stomach is slightly lower than his chest. Open the patients mouth and check that there is no foreign matter in mouth (dentures, chewing gum, etc.).
2
Figure
Kneel beside the patient level with his head. Put an hand under the patient's head and one under his neck. Lift the patient's head and let it recline backwards as far as possible.
3
Shift the hand from the patient's neck to his chin and his mouth, the index along his jawbone, and keep the other fingers closed together. While performing these operations take a good supply of oxygen by taking deep breaths with your mouth open.
4
With your thumb between the patient's chin and mouth keep his lips together and blow into his nasal cavities.
5
While performing these operations observe if the patient's chest rises. If not it is possible that his nose is blocked: in that case open the patient's mouth as much as possible by pressing on his chin with your hand, place your lips around his mouth and blow into his oral cavity. Observe if the patient's chest heaves. This second method can be used instead of the first even when the patient's nose is not obstructed, provided his nose is kept closed by pressing the nostrils together using the hand you were holding his head with. The patient's head must be kept sloping backwards as much as possible.
6
Start with ten rapid expirations, hence continue at a rate of twelve/ fifteen expirations per minute. Go on like this until the patient has regained conscious-ness, or until a doctor has ascertained his death.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
9
2.2
SAFETY RULES
When the equipment units are provided with the plate, shown in Fig.1, it means that they contain components electrostatic charge sensitive.
Fig.1 - Components electrostatic charge sensitive In order to prevent the units from being damaged while handling, it is advisable to wear an elasticised band (Fig.2) around the wrist ground connected through coiled cord (Fig.3).
Band
Elasticized
Fig.2 - Elasticised band
Fig.3 - Coiled cord The units showing the label, shown in Fig.4, include laser diodes and the emitted power can be dangerous for eyes; avoid exposure in the direction of optical signal emission.
LASER
Fig.4 - Laser diodes
10
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
3
PURPOSE AND STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL
3.1
PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL
The purpose of this manual consists in providing the with information which allows to operate and maintain the ALC radio family. Warning: This manual does not include information relevant to the SCT/LCT management program windows and relevant application. They will provided by the program itself as help-on line.
3.2
AUDIENCE BASIC KNOWLEDGE
The following knowledge and skills are required to operate the equipment: •
a basic understanding of microwave transmission
•
installation and maintenance experience on digital radio system
•
a good knowledge of IP/OSI networks and routing policy.
3.3
STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL
The manual is subdivided into sections each of them developing a specific topic entitling the section. Each section consists of a set of chapters, enlarging the main subject master.
Section 1 - Guide It provides the information about the main safety rules and expounds the purpose and the structure of the manual.
Section 2 - Description and specifications It traces the broad line of equipment operation and lists the main technical characteristics of the whole equipment and units it consists of. List of abbreviation meaning is also supplied.
Section 3 - Installation The mechanical installation procedures are herein set down as well as the electrical connections. The content of the tool kit (if supplied) is also listed.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
11
Section 4 - Line-Up Line-up procedures are described as well as checks to be carried out for the equipment correct operation. The list of the instruments to be used and their characteristics are also set down.
Section 5 - Maintenance The routine maintenance actions are described as well as fault location procedures in order to identify the faulty unit and to re-establish the operation after its replacement with a spare one.
Section 6 - Programming and supervision The ALC radio family is programmed and supervised using different software tools. Some of them are already available, some other will be available in the future. This section lists the tools implemented and indicates if descriptions are already available. Each description of software tools is supplied in a separated manual.
Section 7 - Composition Position, part numbers of the components the equipment consist of, are shown in this section.
Section 8 - Lists and assistance service It provides the lists of figures ans tables and the assistance service.
12
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Section 2. DESCRIPTIONS AND SPECIFICATION
4
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
-
AF
Assured Forwarding
-
ALC
Access Link Compact Version
-
ALC plus
Access Link Compact Plus Version
-
AIS
Alarm Indication Signal
-
ATPC
Automatic Transmit Power Control
-
BB
Baseband
-
BBER
Background Block Error Radio
-
BER
Bit Error Rate
-
DS
Differentiated Service Code Point
-
DSP
Digital Signal Processing
-
EMC/EMI
Electromagnetic Compatibility/Electromagnetic Interference
-
EOC
Embedded Overhead Channel
-
ERC
European Radiocommunication Committee
-
ESD
Electrostatic Discharge
-
FEC
Forward Error Corrector
-
FEM
Fast Ethernet Module
-
HDLC
High Level Data Link Control
-
IDU
Indoor Unit
-
IF
Intermediate Frequency
-
IpToS
Type of Service IP
-
LAN
Local Area Network
-
LAPS
Link Access Procedure SDH
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
13
14
-
LCT
Local Craft Terminal
-
LIM
Line Interface Module
-
LLF
Link Loss Forwarding
-
LOF
Loss Of Frame
-
LOS
Loss Of Signal
-
MAC
Media Access Control
-
MDI
Medium Dependent Interface
-
MDIX
Medium Dependent Interface Crossover
-
MIB
Management Information Base
-
MMIC
Monolitic Microwave Integrated Circuit
-
MTBF
Mean Time Between Failure
-
NE
Network Element
-
ODU
Outdoor Unit
-
OSI
Open System Interconnection
-
PDH
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
-
PPI
Plesiochronous Physical Interface
-
PPP
Point to Point Protocol
-
PTOS
Priority Type Of Service
-
RIM
Radio Interface Module
-
SCT
Subnetwork Craft Terminal
-
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol
-
T/IP
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
-
TOS
Type Of Service
-
VID
Virtual LAN Identifier
-
VLAN
Virtual LAN
-
WFQ
Wait Fair Queue
-
Wayside Traffic
Additional 2 Mbit/s Traffic
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
5
SYSTEM PRESENTATION
5.1
RADIO SYSTEM OVERVIEW
5.1.1
General
AL is SIAE's PDH radio series for low-to-medium transmission capacities in frequency bands from 7 to 38 GHz. Different hardware versions offer a range of tributaries traffic from 2xE1 to 32xE1, with or without Ethernet traffic, on 4QAM, 16QAM and 32QAM modulation, with capacity up to 105 Mbit/s. Reduced cost, high reliability, compact size, light weight and full programmability are the key features of this radio series.
5.2
COMPLIANCE WITH INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS
The equipment complies with the following international standards: •
EN 301 489-4 for EMC
•
ITU-R recommendations for all frequency bands
•
EN 300 132-2 characteristics for power supply
•
EN 300 019 environmental characteristics (Operation class 3.2 for IDU and class 4.1 for ODU; storage: class 1.2; transport: class 2.3)
•
EN 60950 for safety.
5.3
APPLICATIONS
AL main applications are: •
radio communication between GSM cells
•
radio links for voice and data transmission
•
spur routes for high capacity radio system
•
emergency links
•
Ethernet traffic in point to point communication.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
15
5.4
SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
The AL radio equipment consist of two separate units: •
the indoor unit (IDU) that houses tributary interfaces, Ethernet ports modem and controller units
•
the outdoor unit (ODU) that converts IF signals into RF signals and vice versa.
The two units are interconnected via coaxial cable. Fig.5 and Fig.6 show a typical IDU/ODU layout whereas Fig.7 and Fig.8 show the radio block diagram in 1+0 and 1+1 configuration respectively.
5.4.1
IDU
The IDU is available in the following hardware versions: •
•
ALC -
1 rack unit compact IDU, 1+0 configuration, 2/4/8 E1
-
1 rack unit compact IDU, 1+0 configuration, 2/4/8/16 E1
-
1 rack unit compact IDU, 1+1 configuration, 2/4/8 E1
-
1 rack unit compact IDU, 1+1 configuration, 2/4/8/16 E1
ALC plus -
1 rack unit compact plus IDU, 1+0 configuration, 2/4/5/8/10/16 E1
-
1 rack unit compact plus IDU, 1+1 configuration, 2/4/5/8/10/16 E1
-
1 rack unit compact plus IDU, 1+0 configuration, 2/4/5/8/10/16/20/32 E1
-
1 rack unit compact plus IDU, 1+0 configuration, 2/4/5/8/10/16/20/32 E1
Ethernet module can be housed inside IDU, as option, for Ethernet traffic. ALC and ALC plus IDUs consist of a single circuit board plugged into a wired shelf. Line interfaces house tributary connections and, through a multiplexing/demultiplexing and bit insertion/extraction process, supply/receive the aggregate signal to/from the modulator/demodulator. Main difference between ALC IDU and ALC plus IDU is the increased capacity (up to 32E1 and up to 105 Mbit/s of total capacity) and the possibility to use the bandwidth of transmitted channel more efficiently: 5 E1 streams can be transmitted in the bandwidth previously used by 4 E1 only, 10 E1 streams can be transmitted in the bandwidth previously used by 8 E1 only, 20 E1 streams can be transmitted in the bandwidth previously used by 16 E1 only. Line interfaces carry out the digital processing for the QAM modulator and, in 1+1 configuration, duplicate the main signals on the transmission side and perform the changeover on the receive side. Interfaces towards the ODU house the cable interface for bidirectional communication between ODU and IDU, and implement the IF section of the mo-demodulator. IDU power supply units process battery voltage and supply power to IDU and ODU circuits. The controller section of the radio houses service channels interfaces, stores IDU firmware, interfaces SIAE management systems though dedicated supervision ports, and routes external and internal alarms to relay s.
5.4.2
ODU
The ODU houses the interface towards the IDU on one side, and towards the antenna flange on the other. The ODU shifts the incoming QAM-modulated carrier to RF frequency through a double conversion. The opposite occurs at the receive side, when the IF-converted carrier is sent to the IDU demodulator. Antenna coupling in 1+1 systems is done through a balanced or unbalanced hybrid. Two versions of ODU are available, ODU AL and ODU AS; they differ in output power.
16
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
5.5
MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS
AL radio can be controlled locally and remotely via SIAE supervision software: •
SCT/LCT: a Windows-based management system for small networks (up to 100 NE)
•
NMS5-LX: a Linux-based management system for small-to-medium networks (up to 750 NE)
•
NMS5-UX: a Unix-based management system for large networks (up to 2500 NE)
These systems provide a friendly graphic interface complying with current standard use of keyboards, mouse and windows.
5.5.1
Management ports
AL radio terminals connect to the supervision network via the following communication ports: •
Ethernet 10BaseT Port (2 port in ALC plus)
•
USB port
5.5.2
Protocols
SNMP along with IP or OSI protocol stacks are used to manage AL operation.
Fig.5 - 1+1 ODU typical configuration with integrated antenna
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
17
TXRX 1 2
Q3
LCT
TEST R AL
TX RX 1 2
Q3/2
V11
Q3/1
RS232
LCT IN/OUT
IN/OUT
DPLX DPLX LINK 2 LINK 3 ACT ACT 10/100 BTX
ALC plus 32E1 + Ethernet
TEST R AL
DPLX LINK 1 ACT
ALC 16E1 + Ethernet
2
Trib. 1-8
Trib. 17-24
1
3
4
Trib. 9-16
Trib. 25-32
5
6
7
1
48V1
9
M 3.15A 250VAC
1
1
8
–
1
3
11
PS 1 2
PS2
2 48VDC
12 PS1
- 48VDC
10/100 BaseT
2
10 2
-
15
2
16
M 3.15A 250VAC
– 48V2
14
ACT LINK
DPX
13
+
18 +
+
+
Fig.6 - 1+1 IDU typical configuration
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
1
1
2
2
Fig.7 - 1+1 equipment block diagram
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
19
SCT/LCT
Main traffic
Services
Services
Main traffic
DSP DEM
DSP DEM
DSP MOD
MAIN
Controller Unit
ALARM
ODU CONTROL
IDU CONTROL
BE
BI
CONTROLLER
DEMUX
MUX
Line Interface
BATT.
INTERF.
MOD
48 V BATT.
IDU
Radio Interface 2
ODU 2 CONTROLLER
IF DEM
INTERF.
CABLE
Radio Interface 1
ODU 1 CONTROLLER
IF MOD
48 V
IF DEM
CABLE
IF
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE INTERF. 2
CABLE INTERF. 1
Rx2
Tx2
Rx1
Tx1
SW CONTR.
SW CONTR.
ODU 2
1.5/7.5 dB
4 dB or
ODU 1
Fig.8 - 1+0 non expandable equipment block diagram
20
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
SCT/LCT
Main traffic
Services
Services
Main traffic
DSP DEM
DS P MOD
MAIN
ALARM
ODU CONTROL
IDU CONTROL
BE
BI
CONTROLLER
DEMUX
MUX
48 V BATT.
ODU CONTROLLER
DEM
IF
MOD
IF
IDU
INTERF.
CABLE
CABLE CABLE INTERF. 1 Rx1
Tx1 SW CONTR.
ODU
6
EQUIPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
6.1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
-
-
-
Frequency range -
7 GHz
7.11 to 7.7 GHz
-
8 GHz
7.7 to 8.5 GHz
-
11 GHz
10.7 to 11.7 GHz
-
13 GHz
12.75 to 13.25 GHz
-
15 GHz
14.4 to 15.35 GHz
-
18 GHz
17.7 to 19.7 GHz
-
23 GHz
21.2 to 23.6 GHz
-
25 GHz
24.5 to 26.5 GHz
-
28 GHz
27.5 to 29.5 GHz
-
38 GHz
37 to 39.5 GHz
RF channel arrangement -
7 GHz
ITU-R Rec F.385
-
8 GHz
ITU-R Rec F.386
-
11 GHz
no ITU-R Rec. for PDH 11 GHz band
-
13 GHz
ITU-R Rec F.497
-
15 GHz
ITU-R Rec F.636
-
18 GHz
ITU-R Rec F.595
-
23 GHz
ERC/T/R 13-02 Annex A or ITU-R Rec F.637
-
25 GHz
ERC/T/R 13-02 Annex B
-
28 GHz
ERC/T/R 13-02 Annex C
-
38 GHz
ITU-R Rec F.749
Go-return frequency -
7 GHz
245/196/168/161/154 MHz
-
8 GHz
311.32 MHz
-
11 GHz
530 MHz
-
13 GHz
266 MHz
-
15 GHz
420/728 MHz
-
18 GHz
1010 MHz
-
23 GHz
1008/1232 MHz
-
25 GHz
1008 MHz
-
28 GHz
1008 MHz
-
38 GHz
1260 MHz
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
21
-
Transmission capacity
see Tab.2 Tab.2 Signal capacity
-
IDU type
Capacity
Configuration
ALC
2/4/8 E1 (max 16 Mbit/s)
1+0/1+1
ALC
2/4/8/16 E1 (max 32 Mbit/s)
1+0/1+1
ALC
2/4/8/16 E1 + 3x10/100BaseT (max 32 Mbit/s)
1+0/1+1
ALC
2/4/8/16 E1 + 3x10/100BaseT (max 64 Mbit/s)
1+0/1+1
ALC plus
2/4/5/8/10/16 E1 (max 32 Mbit/s)
1+0/1+1
ALC plus
2/4/5/8/10/16/20/32 E1 (max 64 Mbit/s)
1+0/1+1
ALC plus
2/4/5/8/10/16/20/32 E1 + 3x10/100BaseT (max 64 Mbit/s)
1+0/1+1
ALC plus
2/4/5/8/10/16/20/32 E1 + 3x10/100BaseT (max 105 Mbit/s)
1+0/1+1
Service channel capacity: -
64 kbit/s V11 co/contradirectional interface or V28 (1x9600 or 2x4800 baud)
-
RS232 PPP for supervision
-
EOW external module (optional) connected to V11 and RS232 ports
-
Antenna configuration
1+0 or 1+1 hot stand-by and 1 antenna, 1+1 frequency diversity on 1 cross polar antenna or two separated antennas
-
Frequency accuracy
± 5 ppm; ± 10 ppm ageing included
-
RF spurious emissions
according to ETSI EN 301 390
-
Modulation
4QAM/16QAM/32QAM (ALC plus only), see Tab.3 Tab.3 - Modulation and channel spacing
Modulation
4 Mbit/s
8 Mbit/s
16 Mbit/s
32 Mbit/s
64 Mbit/s
105 Mbit/s
4QAM
3.5 MHz
7 MHz
14 MHz
28 MHz
-
-
16QAM
-
3.5 MHz
7 MHz
14 MHz
28 MHz
-
32QAM (ALC plus)
-
-
-
-
-
28 MHz
-
Demodulation
coherent
-
Output power at the antenna side, 1+0 version
refer to Tab.4
-
Receiver threshold at the antenna side 1+0 version
refer to Tab.5 and Tab.6
-
22
Capacity
Additional losses both Tx and Rx sides, 1+1 version -
4 dB ± 0.5 dB
version with balanced hybrid
-
≤ 1.7 dB (branch 1) / ≤ 7 dB (branch 2)
version with unbalanced hybrid
-
Residual BER
1x10-11
-
Maximum input level for BER 10-3
-20 dBm
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Tab.4 - Nominal output power 1 dB tolerance - (1+0 version) ODU AL/ODU AS GHz
Output power 4QAM
Output power 16QAM
Output power 32QAM
7
+27/30 dBm
+22/26 dBm
+20/n.a. dBm
8
+27/30 dBm
+22/26 dBm
+20/n.a. dBm
11
+25/29 dBm
+20/25 dBm
-
13
+25/29 dBm
+20/25 dBm
+20/n.a. dBm
15
+25/28 dBm
+20/24 dBm
+20/n.a. dBm
18
+20/24 dBm
+15/20 dBm
+15/20 dBm
23
+20/23 dBm
+15/19 dBm
+15/19 dBm
25
+20/23 dBm
+15/19 dBm
+15/19 dBm
28
+19/22 dBm
+14/18 dBm
+14/18 dBm
32
+17/20 dBm
+13/16 dBm
+13/16 dBm
38
+17/20 dBm
+13/16 dBm
+13/16 dBm
Tab.5 - Guaranteed received threshold in 1+0 configuration (dBm) 4QAM GHz
16QAM
2x2
4x2
2x2
4x2
10-6
10-3
10-6
10-3
10-6
10-3
10-6
10-3
7
-91
-93
-88
-90
-
-
-84
-86
8
-91
-93
-88
-90
-
-
-84
-85
11
-90.5
-92.5
-87.5
-89.5
-
-
-83.5
-85.5
13
-90.5
-92.5
-87.5
-89.5
-83.5
-85.5
15
-90.5
-92.5
-87.5
-89.5
-
-
-83.5
-85.5
18
-90
-92
-87
-89
-
-
-84
-86
23
-90
-92
-87
-89
-
-
-83
-85
25
-89.5
-91.5
-86.5
-88.5
-
-
-82.5
-84.5
28
-89
-91
-86
-88
-
-
-82
-84
38
-88
-90
-85
-88
-
-
-81
-83
Tab.6 - Guaranteed received threshold in 1+0 configuration (dBm) 4QAM GHz
8x2
16QAM 16x2
8x2
16x2
32QAM 32x2
100
10–6
10–3
10–6
10–3
10–6
10–3
10–6
10–3
10–6
10–3
10–6
10–3
7
–85
–87
–82
–84
–81
–83
–78
–80
–75
–77
–72
–74
8
–85
–87
–82
–84
–81
–83
–78
–80
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
11
–84.5 –86.5 –81.5 –83.5 –80.5 –82.5 –77.5 –79.5 –74.5 –76.5 –71.5 –73.5
13
–84.5 –86.5 –81.5 –83.5 –80.5 –82.5 –77.5 –79.5 –74.5 –76.5 –71.5 –73.5
15
–84.5 –86.5 –81.5 –83.5 –80.5 –82.5 –77.5 –79.5 –74.5 –76.5 –71.5 –73.5
18
–84
–86
–81
–83
–80
–82
–77
–79
–74
–76
–71
–73
23
–84
–86
–81
–83
–80
–82
–77
–79
–73
–75
–70
–72
25
–83.5 –85.5 –80.5 –82.5 –79.5 –81.5 –76.5 –78.5 –72.5 –74.5 –69.5 –71.5
28
–83
–85
–80
–82
–79
–81
–76
–78
–72
–74
–69
–71
32
-82
-84
-80
-81
-78
-80
-75
-77
-72
-74
-69
-71
38
–82
–84
–80
–81
–78
–80
–75
–77
–71
–73
–68
–70
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
23
-
Power supply voltage
-40.8 to -57.6 Vdc
-
Power consumption
Fully equipped terminal with 370 m 1/4" IDU/ODU cable (refer to Tab.7). Tab.7 - Power consumption (ODU AL/ODU AS)
-
Configuration
Guaranteed power consumption (IDU) f≤15 GHz -40.8 to -57.6 Vdc
Guaranteed power consumption (IDU) f>15 GHz -40.8 to -57.6 Vdc
1+0
≤ 32W/34W
≤ 25W/34W
1+1
≤ 52W/62W
≤ 40W/62W
Power supply connector consumption
(refer to Tab.8)
Tab.8 - Power supply connector consumption Guaranteed consumption f≤15 GHz da - 40.8 Vdc
Guaranteed consumption f>15 GHz da –40.8 Vdc
≤1A
≤1 A
-
Fuse
-
Environmental conditions
-
3.15 A (M), 5x20 mm on front
-
Operational range for IDU
–5° C to +45° C
-
Operational range for ODU
–33° C to +55° C
-
Survival temperature range for IDU
–10° C to +55° C
-
Survival temperature range for ODU
–40° C to +60° C
-
Operational humidity for IDU
95% at +35° C
-
Operational humidity for ODU
weather proof according to IP65 environmental class
-
Heat dissipation of ODU Solar heat gain: not exceeding 5° C
Thermal resistance 0.5° C/W
-
Wind load
≤ 260 Km/h
Mechanical characteristics -
Dimensions
refer to Tab.9 Tab.9 - IDU/ODU dimensions Width (mm)
Height (mm)
Depth (mm)
ODU AL/ODU AS 1+0
250/255
255/255
100/121
ODU AL/ODU AS 1+1
278/358
255/255
280/280
480
45
260
IDU 1+0/1+1 -
Weight
refer to Tab.10 Tab.10 - IDU/ODU weight
ODU AL/ODU AS 1+0
4.5/5.5 Kg
ODU AL/ODU AS 1+0
13.3/15.5 Kg
IDU 1+0/1+1 Panning system 1+0/1+1
24
3.5/3.7 Kg 4.4 Kg
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
-
Mechanical layout Fig.13.
refer to typical Fig.9, Fig.10, Fig.11, Fig.12 and
Trib. 1–2–3–4
Q3
LCT
48V
IN/OUT
PS TEST R
AL Trib. 5–6–7–8
– +
Fig.9 - IDU ALC 1+0 (2/4/8xE1)
Trib. 1–2–3–4
Q3
LCT
Trib. 9–10–11–12
48V2
48V1
IN/OUT
PS1
TX RX TEST R AL
1
1
2 Trib. 5–6–7–8
1
2
Trib. 13–14–15–16
PS2
–
2
– +
+
Fig.10 - IDU ALC 1+1 (2/4/8/16xE1)
DPLX LINK 1 ACT TEST R AL
TXRX 1 2
DPLX DPLX 2 3 LINK LINK ACT ACT 10/100 BTX
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
9
11
12 PS1
13
14
1 LCT
Q3
15
16 1
2
IN/OUT
48V1
PS2
–
2
– 48V2 +
+
Fig.11 - IDU ALC 1+1 (up to 16xE1 coax. conn.) + Ethernet
V11
48VDC1
M 3.15A 250VAC
48VDC2
1
PS 1
2
2
Q3/2
Q3/1
LCT
IN/OUT
Trib. 1-8
1
Trib. 9-16
-
+
TX RX
Trib. 25-32
+
TEST R AL
Trib. 17-24
RS232
M 3.15A 250VAC
-
1
2
1
2
2
Fig.12 - IDU ALC plus 1+1 (2/4/5/8/10/16/20/32xE1)
Trib. 17-24
RS232
Trib. 25-32
DPX 2
1 TX RX
ACT LINK
10/100 BaseT 1 2
1 Q3/2
Q3/1
LCT
IN/OUT
Trib. 1-8
Trib. 9-16
M 3.15A
250VAC
+
TEST R AL
3
1
- 48VDC
PS 1 2
2 48VDC
+
V11
2
-
M 3.15A
250VAC
Fig.13 - IDU ALC plus 1+1 (2/4/5/8/10/16/20/32xE1) + Ethernet
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
25
Fig.14 - IDU 1+1 (up to 16x2 Mbit/s coax. conn.) + Ethernet module
Fig.15 - 1+1 ODU with separated antenna
26
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Fig.16 - 1+0 ODU with integral antenna (pole mounting)
Fig.17 - 1+1 ODU with integral antenna (pole mounting)
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
27
Fig.18 - 1+1 ODU with separated antenna (wall mounting)
28
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
7
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE INDOOR UNIT
7.1
GENERAL
The following IDU characteristics are guaranteed for the temperature range from –5° C to +45° C.
7.2
TRAFFIC INTERFACE
7.2.1
2 Mbit/s Interface
Input side -
Bit rate
2048 kbit/s ± 50 ppm
-
Line code
HDB3
-
Rated impedance
75 Ohm or 120 Ohm
-
Rated level
2.37 Vp/75 Ohm or 3 Vp/120 Ohm
-
Return loss
12 dB from 57 kHz to 102 kHz 18 dB from 102 kHz to 2048 kHz 14 dB from 2048 kHz to 3072 kHz
-
Max attenuation of the input cable
6 dB according to √ f trend
-
Accepted jitter
see mask in Table 2, CCITT Rec. G.823
-
Transfer function
see mask in Figure 1, CCITT Rec. G.742
-
Connector type
SUB-D, 25 pins
Output side -
Bit rate
2048 kbit/s ± 50 ppm
-
Rated impedance
75 Ohm or 120 Ohm
-
Rated level
2.37 Vp/75 Ohm or 3 Vp/120 Ohm
-
Output jitter
in accordance with G.742/G.823
-
Pulse shape
see mask in Figure 15, CCITT Rec. G.703
-
Connector type
SUB-D, 25 pins
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
29
7.2.2
Ethernet interface (optional)
RJ45 interface -
LAN type
Ethernet Twisted Pair 802.3 10BaseT/100BaseT
-
Connector
RJ45
-
Connection to LAN
direct with a CAT5 Twisted Pair
-
Protocol
T/IP or IPoverOSI
7.3
SERVICE CHANNEL INTERFACE
7.3.1
V.28 low speed synchronous/asynchronous data
-
Data interface
RS232
-
Electrical interface
CCITT Rec. V.28
-
Input speed
9600 baud
-
Control wires
DTR, DSR, DCD
7.3.2
Alarm interface
output -
Relay s
normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC)
-
Open s Rmin
100 MOhm at 500 Vdc
-
Open s Rmax
0.5 Ohm
-
Switching voltage Vmax
100 V
-
Switching current Imax
1A
input -
Equivalent circuit recognised as a closed
200 Ohm resist. (max) referred to ground
-
Equivalent circuit recognised as an open
60 kOhm (min) referred to ground
7.3.3
30
64 kbit/s contra–directional interface V.11 (optional)
-
Tolerance
±100 ppm
-
Equipment side
contra–directional
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
-
Coding
clock and data on independent wires
-
Electrical interface
see Rec. CCITT V.11
7.3.4
Network Management Interface
RJ45 interface -
LAN type
Ethernet Twisted Pair 802.3 10BaseT/100BaseT
-
Connector
RJ45
-
Connection to LAN
direct with a CAT5 Twisted Pair
-
Protocol
T/IP or IPoverOSI
LCT USB interface -
Electrical interface
USB 1.1 version
-
Baud rate
1.5 Mbit/s
-
Protocol
PPP
RS232 interface (optional) -
Electronic interface
V.28
-
Asynchronous baud rate
9600, 19200, 38400, 57600
-
Protocol
PPP
7.4 -
MODULATOR/DEMODULATOR
Carrier modulating frequency -
Tx side
330 MHz
-
Rx side
140 MHz
-
Type of modulatioln
4QAM/16QAM
-
Spectrum shaping versions
from 4 Mbit/s to 34 Mbit/s depending on different
-
Forma dello spettro
raised cosine (roll–off = 0.5)
-
Equalization
5 tap
-
FEC coding gain
2.5 dB at 10–6
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
31
7.5
CABLE INTERFACE
-
Interconnection with the ODU unit
single coaxial cable for both Tx and Rx
-
Cable length
up to 370 m. with 1/4" cable type
-
Rated impedance
50 Ohm
-
Signal running along the cable -
Tx nominal frequency
330 MHz
-
Rx nominal frequency
140 MHz
-
Transceiver management signals
388 kbit/s bidirectional
-
Carrier for transceiver management signals
IDU at ODU = 17.5 MHz/0 dBm ODU at IDU = 5.5 MHz/0 dBm
-
Remote power supply
direct from battery voltage
7.6
AVAILABLE LOOPS
The following loop are available within the IDU:
32
-
Tributary loop
-
Baseband loop
-
IDU loop
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
8
DESCRIPTION OF THE INDOOR UNIT – PDH INTERFACES
8.1
1+0/1+1 IDU
The following functional description covers the versions the IDU consists of as shown in chapter "Equipment technical specifications". The IDU is made up of a single motherboard that houses all the circuitry realizing the following functionalities: •
Line interface
•
Radio interface
•
Equipment controller
•
IDU loops.
The different versions of IDU are pointed out in following description only if it is necessary.
8.1.1
Line interface
The line interface performs the following operations: •
multiplexing process of the input tributaries
•
generation of the aggregate frame by aggregating multiplexed tributaries and service channel.
Bit extraction and demultiplexing process happens at the receive side.
Tx side Refer to Fig.19. The 2 Mbit/s input signal is code converted from HDB3 to NRZ format before being multiplexed. The multiplexing scheme depends on the number and the bit rate of the input tributaries. Attached figures show different multiplexing scheme as follows: •
Fig.20 – 2x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. The mux performs stuffing operation on each single tributary and generates a proprietary frame embedding the two tributaries to be sent to the Bit Insertion. Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side.
•
Fig.21 – 4x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. The mux aggregates the four 2 Mbit/s tributaries generating a 8448 kbit/s frame as per Recc. G.742. The multiplexed signal is then sent to the Bit Insertion. Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side.
•
Fig.22 – 8x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. The eight 2 Mbit/s tributaries are grouped in two 4x2 Mbit/s groups each of one generating a G742 frame structure at 8448 kbit/s to be sent to the next Bit Insertion. Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side.
•
Fig.23 – 16x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. The sixteen 2 Mbit/s tributaries are grouped in four 4x2 Mbit/s groups each of one generating a G.742 frame structure at 8448 kbit/s. A further multiplexing of the achieved four 8448 kbit/s streams will generate a frame structure at 34368 kbit/s as per Recc. G.751. This latter is to be sent to the Bit Insertion. Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side.
The multiplexed tributaries are then sent to the B.I. for aggregate frame generation. The aggregate frame contains:
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
33
•
the main signal from the MUX(s)
•
the framed service signal from the service interface
•
the EOC signals for supervision message propagation towards the remote terminal
•
the frame alignment word
•
the bits dedicated to the FEC.
All the synch. signals to perform multiplexing (demultiplexing) and BI (BE) process are achieved from a x0 at 40 MHz. The aggregate frame thus generates is sent to the QAM modulator.
Rx side Refer to Fig.24. At Rx side the Bit extraction separates the main multiplexed signal from the service signal and then after a proper demultiplexing process (opposite to that previously described at the Tx side) sends them to the output interfaces.
8.1.2
Radio interface
This functionality provides the following: •
QAM modemodulation
•
power supply to IDU and ODU
•
telemetry IDU/ODU
•
cable interface
QAM modemodulation – Modulation side See Fig.25 The aggregate signal from the BI undergoes the following process in digital form: •
serial to parallel conversion
•
differential encoding
•
generation of the shaped modulating signals feeding the IF part of the QAM modulator.
This latter comprises: •
recovery low filter to eliminate signal periodicity
•
330 MHz local oscillator
•
a 90° phase shifter to supply two mixers with two in quadrature carriers
The thus obtained 330 MHz QAM modulated carrier is then sent to the cable interface for connection with ODU.
QAM modemodulation – Demodulation side See Fig.25. The 140 MHz modulated carrier from the ODU is reaching the IDU through the cable interface. The connection to the demodulator input is made via a cable equalizer for cable loss compensation. The IF section of the QAM demodulator extracts the I and Q analogue signals then digital converted for the following processing: •
34
clock recovery
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
•
baseband equalisation and filtering
•
bit polarity decision
•
differential decoding
•
parallel to serial conversion to recover the aggregate signal.
The aggregate signal is then sent to a frame alignment circuit and CRC analysis and then to the error corrector to achieve the BER extimate, the PM and HBER/LBER alarms.
Power supply Refer to Fig.25. The –48 V battery voltage feeds the IDU and ODU circuitry. The service voltages for the IDU feeding are achieved through a DC/DC converter for +3.6 V generation and a step down circuit for –5V. Both voltages are protected against overvoltages and overcurrents. The power to the ODU is given by the same battery running through the interconnection cable. A breaker protects the battery against cable failure.
Telemetry IDU/ODU Refer to Fig.19 and Fig.25. The dialogue IDU/ODU is made–up by the main controller and associated peripherals within the ODU. Controls for ODU management and alarm reporting is performed making use of a 388 kbit/s framed signals. The transport along the interconneting cable is performed via two FSK modulated carriers: 17.5 MHz from IDU to ODU; 5.5 MHZ from ODU to IDU.
Cable interface Refer to Fig.25. This circuit permits to communicate to the far ODU through the interconnecting cable. It is mainly made up of a set of filters that: •
combine the 330 MHz, QAM modulated carrier/the 17.5 MHz carrier/the power supply
•
separate the 140 MHz QAM modulated carrier and the 5.5 MHz carrier
8.1.3
Equipment controller
The controller functionality performs the following: •
houses the equipment software for equipment management
•
interfaces the SCT/LCT program through supervision ports
•
receive external alarms and route them to relay s along with the internal alarms generated by the equipment.
The equipment software permits to control and manage all the equipment functionality. It is distributed on two hardware levels: main controller and ODU peripheral controller. The dialogue between main and peripheral controllers is shown in Fig.26.
Main controller The activities executed by the main controller are the following: •
Communication management: it makes use of SNMP as management protocol and IP or IP over OSI as communication protocol stacks. See Fig.27 for details. The interface ports for the equipment management are the following: -
LAN Ethernet 10BaseT
-
USB port used for SCT/LCT connection
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
35
-
EOC embedded within the PDH radio frame for connection to the remote NEs
•
Log–in: the main controller manages the equipment or network / by setting and then controlling the ’s ID and relevant .
•
Database (MIB): validation and storing in a non–volatile memory of the equipment configuration parameters.
•
Equipment configuration: distribution of the parameters stored in the MIB towards the peripheral µPs for their attuation in addition to the controls from not stored in the MIB (i.e. loops, manual forcing etc...).
•
Alarm monitoring: acquisition, filtering and correlation of the alarms gathered from slaved µPs. Local logger and alarm sending to the connected managers: SCT/LCT – NMS5UX. Management of the alarm signalling on the LIM front .
•
Performances: PM management as per Recc. G.828.
•
: the main controller is equipped with two flash memory banks containing the running program (active bank) and the stand–by program (inactive bank). This permits to a new software release to the inactive bank without distributing the traffic. Bank switch enables the new release to be used. activity is based on FTP protocol which s application programs, FPGA configuration, configuration files on main controller inactive bank or directly on the peripheral controllers.
Peripheral controllers The peripheral controllers take place within the ODU and are slaved to main controller with the task of activating controls and alarm reporting of dedicated functionality.
8.2
IDU LOOPS
To control the IDU correct operation a set of local and remote loops are made available. The commands are forwarded by the LCT/SCT program. Loop block diagram is shown by Fig.28.
8.2.1
Tributary loop
Tributary local loop Each input tributary is routed directly to the trib. output upon receiving the command from the LCT. The Tx line transmission is still on.
Tributary remote loop Each tributary directed towards the Rx output line is routed back to the Tx line. The Rx line is still on.
8.2.2
Baseband unit loop
This kind of loop is only local and is activated at BI/BE level. Tx line is still on.
36
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
nx2
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Code converter
Code converter
CK
NRZ
CK
NRZ
MUX 2x2/4x2 8x2/16x2 see Fig. 8.2 through Fig. 8.5 Frame generator
BI: – main traffic – services – EOC – FEC – FAW
to/from main controller
– FSK mod/demod – 388 frame generator/receiver
X0 38.88 MHz
Aggregate frame
17.5 MHz
5.5 MHz
8.2.3 IDU loop
This kind of loop permits to check the full IDU digital operation.
Fig.19 - Line interface block diagram – Tx side
37
Aggregate Ck
Ck 2x2 Mbit/s
MUX proprietary frame
B.I. Tx data Ck
2x2 Mbit/s
DEMUX proprietary frame
B.E. Rx data
Fig.20 - 2x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing
Aggregate Ck 4x2 Mbit/s Ck MUX 2 –>8 G.742 4x2 Mbit/s
B.I. Framed data 8448 Tx Ck
DEMUX 2 –>8 G.742
B.E. Framed data 8448 Rx
Fig.21 - 4x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing
38
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Aggregate Ck 4x2 Mbit/s Ck MUX 2 –>8 G.742
Data
B.I.
4x2 Mbit/s MUX 2 –>8 G.742
4x2 Mbit/s
Framed data 8448 Tx Data
Ck 8448 kHz Tx DEMUX 8 –> 2 G.742
Data
B.E.
4x2 Mbit/s DEMUX 8 –> 2 G.742 Framed data 8448 Rx Fig.22 - 8x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
39
Aggregate Ck 4x2 Mbit/s MUX 2 –>8 G.742
B.I.
4x2 Mbit/s MUX 2 –>8 G.742 Ck 34368 kHz Tx
4x2 Mbit/s MUX 2 –>8 G.742
Framed data 34368 kbit/s
Ck 8448 kHz Tx 4x2 Mbit/s MUX 8–>34 G.751
MUX 2 –>8 G.742 Framed data 8448 kbit/s Tx
Aggregate Ck 4x2 Mbit/s DEMUX 8 –>2 G.742
B.E.
4x2 Mbit/s DEMUX 8 –>2 G.742 Ck 34368 kHz
4x2 Mbit/s DEMUX 8 –>2 G.742
Framed data 34368 kbit/s
Ck 8448 kHz 4x2 Mbit/s MUX 34–>8 G.751
DEMUX 8 –>2 G.742 Framed data 8448 kbit/s Tx
Fig.23 - 16x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing
40
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Fig.24 - Line interface block diagram (Rx side)
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
41
from demodulator side of the radio interface BE See Fig. 8.2 through Fig. 8.5
DEMUX 2/2x2/4x2 8x2/16x2
Code converter
Code converter nx2 Mbit/s
Fig.25 - Radio interface block diagram
42
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
to BE of line interface FEC CRC analysis & aligner
A
DC
DEM QAM (IF part)
DC
Remote power supply
17.5 MHz
5.5 MHz
330 MHz
Overcurrent protect.
– Ck recovery I&Q D – Carrier lock – Equaliz. & filt. – Decision – Diff. decod. – S/P
battery –48 V
to line interface
QAM MOD (IF part)
from line interface
– S/P conversion – diff. encoding – modulating signal generator
– BER extimates – High BER – Low BER – EW
– BER meas. – P.M.
aggregate frame (from BI of line interface)
Cable equaliz.
Step down
I/V protect
–5 V
+3.6 V
Cable interface
EOC
ODU 338 kb/s gen/rec.
388 kbit/s
FSK modem
FSK modem
388 kbit/s generator receiver
Main controller
Peripheral controller
Alarm/ Out In USB LAN
Fig.26 - Main and peripheral controller connection
APPLICATION SOFTWARE Applic./present. session layers
SNMP
Transport layer
T/UDP
IPoverOSI
Routing layer
IP
IS–IS ISO 10589
Data link layer
PPP
PPP
LLC MAC
LAPD Q921
LCC MAC
Physical layer
USB
EOC
Ethernet LAN
EOC
Ethernet LAN
Fig.27 - IP/IPoverOSI protocol stack
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
43
Fig.28 - IDU loopback
44
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Trib. loc. loop
Trib. OUT
Trib. IN Trib. rem. loop DEMUX
MUX
BE
BI
IDU
BB loop
DEM
MOD
IDU loop
IF combiner
9
DESCRIPTION OF THE INDOOR UNIT – ETHERNET INTERFACES
The indoor unit can be provided with Ethernet module. In this way the equipment has both 2 Mbit/s and Ethernet ports, and the bit rate assigned to Ethernet traffic is the nominal capacity of the radio minus enabled tributaries. Description that follows covers Ethernet signal treatment, 2 Mbit/s signal treatment has been described in previous chapter.
9.1
TREATMENT OF ETHERNET SIGNALS
In the place of V11 or (V28 + RS232) board it is possible to have Ethernet Module. In this way the IDU is equipped with the following interfaces: •
3x electrical interface Ethernet 10/100 BaseT IEEE 802.3
•
16 E1 interfaces in ALC
•
32 E1 interfaces in ALC plus
•
total capacity from 4 to 64 Mbit/s (ALC) or from 4 to 105 Mbit/s (ALC plus)
Most important functions are: •
multiplexing of 2 Mbit/s tributaries
•
concatenation of 2 Mbit/s streams
•
LAPS Link Access Procedure SDH (ITU X.86) for concatenated 2 Mbit/s
•
bridge/switch between a local LAN port and the radio LAN port
•
MAC switching
•
MAC address learning
•
MAC address ageing
•
Ethernet interface with autonegotiation 10/100, full duplex, half duplex -
Ethernet interface with Flow Control, Back Pressure, MDI/MDX crossover
•
network segmentation into bridge
•
virtual LAN as per IEEE 802.1q (anyone from 0 to 4095 VID for a maximum of 64 memory location) (see Fig.30)
•
layer 2 QoS, priority management as per IEEE 802.1p (see Fig.30)
•
layer 3 ToS/DS (see Fig.33)
•
packet forwarding
A block diagram of IDU with Ethernet module can be found into Fig.29. In the IDU with Ethernet module there is a "switch" with 3 external ports and 1internal ports. External ports are electrical Ethernet 10/100BaseT interfaces placed on the front . Internal port is connected to radio side stream. Ethernet traffic coming from external ports goes to internal port radio side. The radio side port is connected to streams group of concatenated 2 Mbit/s.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
45
The concatenated 2 Mbit/s are assembled in a protocol called LAPS similar to HDLC. In Tx side Ethernet traffic is packet into a protocol called LAPS similar to HDLC. The resulting stream is divided into the used number of 2 Mbit/s streams. The 2 Mbit/s streams are then multiplexed, together with 2 Mbit/s arriving from front , the resulting stream goes to the modulator, see Fig.29. In Rx the stream arriving from the demodulator is divided into the 2 Mbit/s streams, then the 2 Mbit/s not used into the front 2 Mbit/s are concatenated and sent to Ethernet circuits. Resulting stream, after LAPS protocol control, is sent to switch internal port.
9.1.1
2 Mbit/s tributaries
Tributary channels at 2 Mbit/s (E1), connected to relevant connectors into front , are multiplexed as into standard IDU, see previous chapter. From 0 to 16 tributaries can be selected to be used via SCT/LCT program, all the other available 2 Mbit/s are sent to switch internal port.
9.1.2
Electrical Ethernet interface
The electrical Ethernet/Fast Ethernet interfaces are type IEEE 802.3 10/100BaseT with RJ45 connector. For input or output signals at RJ45 please refer to connection chapter. Cable can be UTP (Unshielded Twisted Pair) or STP (Shielded Twisted Pair) Category 5. Standard coding: •
Ethernet 10 Mbit/s: Manchester
•
Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit/s: MLT–3 ternary
EMC/EMI protection: •
Input and output pins are galvanically isolated through a transformer
•
to reduce EMI every pin at RJ45 connector is terminated even if not used
•
two signal lines are equipped with low capacity secondary protection to sustain residuals of possible electrostatic discharges (ESD).
With LCT/SCT program it is possible to activate autonegotiation (speed/duplex/flow control) on 10/100BaseT interface.
9.1.3
Front LEDs of Ethernet ports
There are 2 Leds for any Ethernet interface: •
DUPLEX: color green, On = full duplex, OFF = half duplex
•
LINK/ACT: color green, ON = link up without activity, OFF = link down, BLINKING = link with activity on Rx and Tx.
9.1.4
Bridge/switch function
A radio link equipped with Ethernet module can operate like a bridge/switch between two or more separated LANs with the following advantags:
46
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
•
to connect two separated LANs at a distance even greater than the maximum limits of 2.5 km (for Ethernet)
•
to connect two LANs via radio within a complex digital network
•
to keep separated the traffic into two LANs towards MAC filtering to get a total traffic greater than traffic in a single LAN.
The bridge realized into Ethernet module is a transparent bridge (IEEE 802.1 part D) into the same Vlan described by VLAN Configuration Table. The bridge works at data link level, Layer 2 of OSI pile, and leave untouched Layer 3. The bridge takes care to sendo traffic from a local LAN, to remote LAN. Routing is only on the basic of Level 2 addresses, sublevel MAC. The operation of bridge is the following: •
when a bridge interface receives a MAC frame, the bridge on the basis of destination address, decides which LAN to send it
•
if destination address is on originating LAN the frame is descarded
•
if destination address is a known address (towards address learning procedure) and is present into local address table the frame is sent only on destintion LAN (MAC switching)
•
otherwise the frame is sent to all ports with the same VLAN ID (flooding).
A bridge is very different from a repeater, which copies slavishly everything that receives from a line on all the others. The bridge, in fact, acquires a frame, analyzes it, reconstruct it and routes it. The bridge compensates also the different speeds of the interfaces, therefore an input can be at 100 Mbit/s and output at 10 Mbit/s. The mechanism is the following: •
from the moment of its activation, the bridge examines all the frames that arrive it from different LANs, and on these basis it builds its routing tables progressively. In fact, every received frame allows the bridge to know on what LAN the sending station is located (MAC address learning).
•
every frame that arrives to the bridge is rebroadcasted:
•
-
if the bridge has the destination address into the routing table, sends the frame only into the corresponding LAN
-
otherwise the frame is sent to all the LANs except the originating (flooding)
-
as soon as the bridge increases its knowledge of different machines, the retransmission becomes more and more selective (and therefore more efficient)
the routing tables are updated every some minutes (programmable), removing addresses not alive in the last period (so, if a machine is moved, within a few minute it is addressed correctly) (MAC address ageing).
The whole process of bridging is restricted to the ports which are of the same Vlan as described into Vlan Configuration Table.
9.1.5
Ethernet Full Duplex function
The first realizations of the Ethernet network were on coaxial cable with the 10Base5 standard. According to this standard Ethernet interfaces (e.g. PC) are connected to the coaxial cable in parallel and are normally in receiving mode. Only one PC, at a certain time, transmits on the cable, the others are receiving, so this is half duplex mode, and only one PC uses the recived message. Then the coaxial cable was progressively replaced by the pairs cable Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) as per 10BaseT standard. Normally there are four pairs into UTP Cat5 cable but two pairs are used with 10BaseT, one for Tx one for Rx. Into 10Base5 and 10BaseT standards, network protocols are the same the difference lays into the electrical interface. UTP cable is connected point to point betwen a hub and a Ethernet interface. Network structure is a star where the server is connected to a hub and from this a UTP cable is laid down for each Ethernet interface starts.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
47
The further step is to replace the hub with a more powerful equipment, e.g. a switch. In this case it is possible to activate transmission on both pairs at the same time, on one twisted pair for one direction, on the other pair for opposite direction. Thus we obtain full duplex transmission on UTP. Activating full duplex transmission it is possible to obtain a theoretical increase of performance of nearly 100%. Full duplex mode can be activated into 10/100BaseT interfaces manually or with autonegotiation 100BaseFx operates always into full duplex mode.
9.1.6
Link Loss Forwarding
Link Loss Forwarding (LLF) is an alarm status of ethernet interface. LLF can be enabled or disabled. If LLF is enabled an US radio alarm condition will generate the alarm status of Ethernet interface blocking any transmission to it. LLF can be enabled for each 3 ports at front . With LLF enabled the equipment connected (routers, switches so on) can be notified that radio link is not available and can temporarerly reroute the traffic.
9.1.7
MDI/MDIX cross–over
The Ethernet electrical interface can be defined by SCT program as MDI or MDIX to cross–over between pairs so that external cross–over cable is not required.
9.1.8
VLAN functionality
LIM Ethernet module works with IEEE 802.1q and 802.1p tag for VLANs and QoS see Fig.30. The virtual LAN (VLAN) are logical separated subnets so that all the stations, into VLAN, seem to be into the same physical LAN segment even if they are geographically separated. The VLAN are used to separate traffic on the same physical LAN too. Station operating on the same physical LAN but on different VLAN work in separated mode thus they do not share broadcast and multicast messages. This results in a reduction of broadcast generated traffic and above all we get more security thanks to network separation. Tag position and structure are shown into Fig.30. Tag is made up with: •
a fixed word of 2 bytes
•
3 bits for priority according 802.1p
•
1 fixed bit
•
12 bits VLAN identifier (VLAN ID) according 802.1q.
Switch crossconnections are based on Vlan Configuration Table where input and output ports or only output ports should be defined for any used VID. Vlan Configuration Table has 64 position for Vlan ID range from 1 to 4095.
9.1.9
Switch organized by port
For each input port it is possible to define where to route the incoming traffic; one or more of the 3 other ports can be Enabled to exit the incoming traffic. It is possible, also, to route back the incoming traffic into
48
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
the same port. This type of connection are monodirectional. For a dibirectional connection between a generic Lan A and Lan B it is necessary to set the connection from Lan A to Lan B and from Lan B to Lan A. The IDU with Ethernet module has 3 physical ports and one internal port, radio side. The internal switch can connect two or more ports together. Then MAC address bridging rules will be applied to this packet. It is possible to select that a packet follows the description of Vlan Configuration Table for its Vlan ID. Another selection is to follow only Vlan Configuration Table. Packets can exit from a port as Unmodified or all Tagged either all Untagged. Unteggad packets will take default tags. For output operations there are 3 selections: •
Unmodified: tagged packets keep their tag. Untagged packets remain untagged
•
Tagged: all the packets will exit tagged, tagged packets keep their tag, untagged packets take Default VID of incoming port.
•
Untagged: all the packets will exit untagged.
9.1.10
Switch organized by VLAN ID
Vlan Configuration Table Vlan Configuration Table defines a list of Vlan ID, For any Vlan ID some ports are of Vlan others are not . Ports of a Vlan are allowed to receive and send packets with that Vlan. Switch dinamically assignes packets to the output port according their VLAN ID. Packets aren’t sent out to that port unless they belong to one of the Vlan of which the port is a member. A port can be a member of a Vlan or many Vlan. A port can be a member from 1 to 64 Vlans but tagged packets are dropped if their input port is not a member of packet’s Vlan. After the control of packet and port Vlan hip MAC address bridging rules will be applied to this packet.
Ingress Filtering Check This is a process to check an incoming packet to compare its Valn ID to input port’s Vlan hip. With Ingress Filtering Check it is possible to permit only to tagged packets to enter the switch. If the port is not member of the Vlan n. XX all the incoming packets with Vlan ID XX will be dropped. There are 3 option into Ingress Filtering Check to manage incoming packets: •
Disable: all Tagged and Untagged packets can transit into the switch following setting of swicth organized by port.
•
Fallback: Untagged frames follow the rules of switch organized by port, Tagged frames with Vlan ID described into the Vlan Configuration Table follow the rules of the table, Tagged frames with Vlan ID not described into the Vlan Configuration Table follow the rules of switch organized by port.
•
Secure: Untagged frames cannot enter the switch, Tagged frames with Vlan ID described into the Vlan Configuration Table follow the rules of the table, Tagged frames with Vlan ID not described into the Vlan Configuration Table cannot enter the switch.
Operations at the input. At the input port the packet is received and a switching decision must be made. The switch analyse the Vlan ID (if present) and decides whether and where to forward the frame. If the received packet is untagged, the switch sends the packet to the port specified into incoming port "Lan per port" settings. If the packet is tagged the switch check the other 3 destination ports to find at least one with the same Vlan ID and put the packet into output port queue. If the Vlan ID is not listed into Vlan Configuration Table the switch sends the packet to the port specified into incoming port "Lan per port" settings.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
49
Then MAC address bridging rules will be applied to this packet. Operations at the output. For each output port there are 3 selections for outgoing packets. •
Disable output port
•
Enable unchanged: tagged packets keep their tag. Untagged packets remain untagged.
•
Enable tagged: all the packets will exit tagged with Vlan ID specified into Vlan Configuration Table, tagged packets keep their tag, untagged packets take Default VID of incoming port.
•
Untagged: all the packets will exit untagged.
9.1.11
Layer 2, Priority function, QoS, 802.1p
Some services as voice overIP and videoconference have some time limits to work properly. A solution is to increase the priority of time sensitive packets. In this case random crowding coming from other services affects the delay of prioritized packets a lot less. Into LIM Ethernet module different priority of incoming packets is managed using Tag defined into IEEE 802.1p (see Fig.30). Every switch output port holds 4 output queues: queue 4 has highest priority, queue 0 has the lowest priority (see Fig.31). Priority can be organized by incoming port or by incoming priority tag: •
Priority by incoming port. For Untagged packets at each input ports it is decided to send the packets to one of the 4 queues of output ports defining which is the Default Priority Queue: Queue = 0, 1, 2, 3. For Tagged packets it is necessary to Disable Priority so they will go in the same queue of Untagged packets.
•
Priority by incoming priority. For tagged packets for each priority tag (3 bits = for 7 priority levels) it is possible to define where to send the packets, into Queue from 0 to 3. Priority must be enable on 802.1p mode only or IpToS mode only (see next paragraph) or first check 802.1p mode and IpToS mode either first check IpToS mode only (see next paragraph) or first check 802.1p mode and IpToS mode either first check IpToS mode and then 808.1q. For untagged packets the priority is defined only by incoming port.
Outgoing packet policy at output ports can be WFQ (Wait Fair Queue) with fixed proportional output policy 8 packets from Queue 3, 4 from Queue 2, 4 from Queue 1, 1 from Queue 0.
Layer 3, Priority function, QoS, IP–V4 ToS (DS) Only for IP packets it is possible to use incoming Layer 3 ToS (see Fig.32) to prioritize incoming packets. The 8 bits available can be read as 7 bits of ToS or 6 bits of DS as shown in Fig.33. According priority defined into ToS/DS the packet is sent into high priority queue low priority queue of output ports. With SCT/LCT program it is possible to select a different output queue for any ToS/DS priority level at each input port.
50
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
2 Mbit/s
10/100BaseT
MUX 16x2 Mbit/s
MUX 16x2 Mbit/s CONCATENATED 2 Mbit/s
10/100BaseT
10/100BaseT
10/100BaseT
0–16x2 Mbit/s
LAPS
Only for 32x2 Mbit/s version
PDH radio
PDH RADIO
Fig.29 - LIM Ethernet 2 Mbit/s block diagram
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
51
Ethernet Layer 2 Header, non–802.1p Destination
Source
Type/Length
Ethernet Layer 2 Header, 802.1p Destination
Source
Tag Control Info
Type/Length
Ethernet Layer 2 Header, 802.1p Tagged frame type interpretation
3 bit priority field 802.1p Canonical
12–bit 802.1q VLAN Identifier
8100 h 2–Bytes
3–Bits
1–Bit
12–Bits
Type = 2 byte (8100) Level 2 priority (802.1p) = 3 bit (value from 0 to 7) Level 2 VLAN (802.1q) = 12 bit (value from 1 to 4095) Canonical form = 1 bit (shows if MAC addresses of current frame are with canonical form): – C = 0 canonical form (MAC with LSB at left) (always into Ethernet 802.3 frames) – C = 1 canonical form (MAC with MSB ay left) (token ring and some FDDI) Fig.30 - Tag control into field
Queue 3
Queue 2 Input port
Queue 1
Output Port
Queue 0
Fig.31 - Output queues
52
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
4
4
8
Version
IHL
TOS
16 Total Length Flags
Total Length TTL
Protocol ID
Fragment Offset
Header Checksum
Source IP Address Destination IP Address Padding
Options Data
Fig.32 - ToS/DS tag position into IP packets
MSB 0
LSB 1
2
3
DS
4
5
6
7
Not used
ToS
Not used
Fig.33 - ToS/DS
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
53
10
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE OUTDOOR UNIT
10.1
GENERAL
The following ODU characteristics are guaranteed for the temperature range from –33° C to +55° C.
10.2
54
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
-
Output power at the antenna side
-
Transceiver tuning range
see Tab.11
-
7 GHz
42 MHz (154 MHz duplex spacing) 56 MHz (161/168/196 MHz duplex spacing) 84 MHz (245 MHz duplex spacing)
-
13 GHz
84 MHz
-
15 GHz
119 MHz
-
18 GHz
330 MHz
-
23 GHz
336 MHz
-
25 GHz/28 GHz
448 MHz
-
38 GHz
560 MHz
-
RF frequency agility
-
Duplex spacing
125 kHz step
-
7 GHz
245/196/168/161/154 MHz
-
8 GHz
311,32 MHz
-
11 GHz
530 MHz
-
13 GHz
266 MHz
-
15 GHz
420/490/728 MHz
-
18 GHz
1010 MHz
-
23 GHz
1008/1232 MHz
-
25 GHz/28 GHz
1008 MHz
-
38 GHz
1260 MHz
-
ATPC dynamic range
40 dB
-
Transmit power attenuation range
40 dB dynamic, 1 dB software adjustable
-
Transmitter shut–down
40 dB
-
Antenna side flange -
7/8 GHz
PBR84 or UBR841
-
13 GHz
UDR120 or UBR140
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
-
15 GHz
UDR140 or UBR140
-
18/23/25 GHz
PBR220 or UBR220
-
28/38 GHz
PBR320 or UBR320
-
AGC dynamic range
from –20 dBm to threshold corresponding to BER10–3
-
Accuracy of Rx level indication (PC reading) –3
±dB in the range –40 dBm to –75 dBm
-
Maximum input level for BER 10
±4 dB in the range –30 dBm to –40 dBm
-
Type of connector at the cable interface side
–20 dBm
-
Signals at the cable interface
"N"
-
QAM modulated carrier
330 MHz (from IDU to ODU) 140 MHz (from ODU to IDU)
-
Telemetry
388 kbit/s
-
Telemetry carriers
17.5 MHz (from IDU to ODU) 5.5 MHz (from ODU to IDU)
-
Available loops
RF loop Tab.11 - Nominal output power ± 1 dB tolerance
GHz
Output power 4QAM
Output power 16QAM
Output power 32QAM
7
+27/30 dBm
+22/26 dBm
+20/n.a. dBm
8
+27/30 dBm
+22/26 dBm
+20/n.a. dBm
11
+25/29 dBm
+20/25 dBm
-
13
+25/29 dBm
+20/25 dBm
+20/n.a. dBm
15
+25/28 dBm
+20/24 dBm
+20/n.a. dBm
18
+20/24 dBm
+15/20 dBm
+15/20 dBm
23
+20/23 dBm
+15/19 dBm
+15/19 dBm
25
+20/23 dBm
+15/19 dBm
+15/19 dBm
28
+19/22 dBm
+14/18 dBm
+14/18 dBm
32
+17/20 dBm
+13/16 dBm
+13/16 dBm
38
+17/20 dBm
+13/16 dBm
+13/16 dBm
Note In 1+1 hot stand–by version the output power decreases by the following values:
1
•
–4 dB ±0.5 dB (balanced hybrid)
•
–1.7/7 dB ±0.3 dB (unbalanced hybrid)
PBR with integrated antenna UBR with separated antenna
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
55
11
DESCRIPTION OF THE OUTDOOR UNIT
11.1
GENERAL
The 1+0 ODU (refer to Fig.34) consists of a two aluminium shell mechanical structure, one shell housing all the ODU circuits, the other forming the covering plate. Two ODU versions are available and are pointed out in the following description if it is necessary. The two ODU versions differ in Tx power and dimensions. On the ODU are accessible: •
the "N" type connector for cable interfacing IDU and ODU
•
the "BNC" connector for connection to a multimeter with the purpose to measure the received field strength
•
a ground bolt.
The 1+1 hot stand–by version (refer to Fig.35) consist of two 1+0 ODUs mechanically secured to a structure housing the hybrid for the antenna connection.
11.2
TRANSMIT SECTION
Refer to block diagram shown in Fig.36. The 330 MHz QAM modulated carrier from the cable interface (see chapter 11.4) is forwarded to a mixer ing through a cable equalizer for cable loss compensation up to 40 dB at 330 MHz. The mixer and the following band filter give rise to a second IF Tx carrier the frequency of which depends on the go/return frequency value. The mixer is of SHP type. The IF Tx frequency is μP controlled. Same happens to Rx IF and RF local oscillators. This latter is common to both Tx and Rx sides. The IF carrier is converted to RF and then amplified making use of a MMIC circuit. The conversion mixer is SSB type with side band selection. The power at the MMIC output can be manually attenuated, 1 dB step. The automatic adjustment is performed making use of an ATPC (see paragraph 11.5 for details). The regulated output power is kept constant against amplifier stage gain variation by a including the AGC. Before reaching the antenna side the RF signal at the output of MMIC es through the following circuits: •
a decoupler plus detector diode to measure the output power
•
a circulator to protect the amplifier stages against possible circuit mismatch.
•
a ON/OFF switch for 1+1 operation
•
an RF band filter for antenna coupling.
An RF coupler plus a detector and a shift oscillator made up the RF loop which is enabled upon receiving a μP control. The RF loop permits the Tx power to return back to receive side thus controlling the total local radio terminal performance.
56
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
11.3
RECEIVE SECTION
The RF signal from the Rx band filter is sent to a low noise amplifier that improves the receiver sensitivity. The following down–converter translates the RF frequency to approximately 765 MHz. The conversion mixer is SSB type. The sideband selection is given through a μP control. A second down converter generates the 140 MHz IF carrier to be sent to the demodulator within the IDU. The level of the IF carrier is kept constant to –5 dBm thank to the IF amplifier stages, AGC controlled, distributed in the IF chain. In addition the AGC gives a measure of the receive RF level. Between two amplifiers a band filter assures the required selectivity to the receiver. The filter is SAW type and the bandwidth depends on the transmitted capacity.
11.4
CABLE INTERFACE
The cable interface permits to interface the cable interconnecting IDU to ODU and viceversa. It receives/transmits the following signals: •
330 MHz (from IDU to ODU)
•
140 MHz (from ODU to IDU)
•
17.5 MHz (from IDU to ODU)
•
5.5 MHz (from ODU to IDU)
•
remote power supply.
The 17.5 MHz and 5.5 MHz FSK modulated carriers, carry the telemetry channel. This latter consists of two 388 kbit/s streams one from IDU to ODU with the information to manage the ODU (RF power, RF frequency, capacity, etc...) while the other, from ODU to IDU, sends back to IDU measurements and alarms of the ODU. The ODU management is made by a μP.
11.5
ATPC OPERATION
The ATPC regulates the RF output power of the local transmitter depending on the value of the RF level at the remote terminal. This value has to be preset from the local terminal as threshold high and low. The difference between the two thresholds must be equal or higher than 3 dB. As soon as the received level crosses the preset threshold level low (see Fig.39) due to the increase of the hop attenuation, a microP at the received side of the remote terminal sends back to the local terminal a control to increase the transmitted power. The maximum ATPC range is 40 dB. If the hop attenuation decreases and the threshold high is crossed then the control sent by the microP causes the output power to decrease. ATPC range can be reduced from the maximum value to 0 dB, by 1 dB step, consequently to a reduction of the output maximum power through an adjusted attenuation.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
57
11.6
1+1 Tx SYSTEM
The two ODUs are coupled to the antenna side via a balanced or unbalanced hybrid. 1+1 Tx switching occurs in the 1+1 hot stand–by 1 antenna or 2 antennas versions as shown in Fig.37 and Fig.38. The transmitter switchover is electromechanic type and consists of two ON/OFF switches within the two ODUs that assure at least 40 dB insulation on the stand–by transmitter. Transmit alarm priority is shown in Tab.12. Tab.12 - Transmit alarm priority Priority
Highest
Lowest
11.7
Levels
Definition
Priority 1
RIM PSU Alarm
Priority 2
Manual forcing
Priority 3
Cable Short Alarm
Priority 3
Cable Open Alarm
Priority 3
Modulator Failure
Priority 3
ODU Unit Failure Alarm
Priority 3
VCO Failure Alarm
Priority 3
IF Unit Alarm
Priority 3
ODU PSU Alarm
Priority 3
Tx Power Low Alarm
Priority 4
Request from remote terminal (both receivers alarmed)
Priority 5
Revertive Tx (branch one preferential)
POWER SUPPLY
The battery voltage is dropped from the cable interface and then sent to a DC/DC converter to generate three stabilized output voltages to be distributed to the ODU circuitry: •
+3.5 V
•
a voltage comprised between +6.2 V and +8.2 V to power amplifiers operating at different frequency bands
•
a –12 V through an inverter circuit.
Each voltage is protected against overcurrent with automatic restart. Protection against overvoltage occurs as soon as the output voltage raises more than 15% respect to the nominal voltage. The restart is automatic.
58
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
”N” ”BNC” Ground bolt Fig.34 - 1+0 ODU version
Fig.35 - 1+1 hot stand–by version
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
59
Fig.36 - ODU block diagram
60
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
PRx meas.
BNC
N type
PRx meas
MOD
330 MHz
x
AGC
–12 V
+6.2 to 8.2 V
+3.5 V
DEM 17.5 MH z
ctrl
variable bw (capacity depending)
388 kbit/s
control
Alarm manag MUX & DEMUX
Cable equaliz.
388 kbit/s
INV
Step up
140 MHz
REC 17.5 MHz
5.5 5.5 MHz MHz
17.5 MHz
Cable interface
–48 V
DC
DC
1 40 MHz
Alm loops ctrl
comm
Rx
unit
IF LO
Tx
T
AGC
approx. 765 MHz
ctrl
IF Tx
PTx att. control 0 to 40 dB
Tx
Rx
RF LO unit
ctrl
LNA
MMIC
RF loop
x
antenna side
Tx side SW control Rx side Antenna side Tx side SW control Rx side
Fig.37 - 1+1 hot stand–by 1 antenna
Tx side SW control
First antenna
Rx side
Tx side SW control
Second antenna
Rx side
Fig.38 - 1+1 hot stand–by 2 antennas
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
61
RemotePRx dBm Local Thresh High
Remote
Rx
Tx PTxactuation
Thresh Low
µP
Rx
Transmission
PRx recording level µP PTx control
Tx
of PTx control
Hop attenuation (dB) LocalPTx dBm PTx max. 20 dB ATPC range
PTx min.
Hop attenuation (dB) Fig.39 - ATPC operation
62
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
12
24/48 VOLT DC/DC CONVERTER D52089
12.1
GENERAL
The 24/48V DC/DC converter D52089 is a unit which converts the voltage of 24 Vdc in –48 Vdc. This unit is housed in a subrack 1 RU unit G52004 with two D52089 units (1+1 version). For 1+0 version the subrack is G52003 with one D52089 unit and the remaining half front has a cover. These subracks have a free air gap for cooling purpose. The DC/DC converter unit D52089 is shown in Fig.40. Fuse 6.3 A
–
Green LED
24Vdc IN
–
+
ON
+
M6,3A 250V
24 Vdc input male 3W3 connector
ALARM 48Vdc OUT 2A
48 Vdc output female 3W3 connector
CM2 connector
Fig.40 - DC/DC converter front coverplate
12.2
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
-
Operational range
-10° ÷ 50° C
-
Storage range
-40° ÷ 80° C
-
Operational humidity
90% max in the range -5° ÷ 30° C
12.3
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
-
Vinput
24 Vdc (20.4 ÷ 28.8 Vdc floating)
-
Voutput
52 Vdc
-
Max current in input
4.5 A
-
Max 24 Vdc consumption
90 W
-
Max 48 Vdc load
75 W
-
Secondary voltage ripple
≤ 200 mVpp
-
Surge current (Inrush current)
ETS 300 132-2
-
Conducted immunity
ETS 300 132-2
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
63
-
Conducted emission
ETS 300 132-2
-
Short duration voltage transient
ETS 300 132-2 (ETR 283)
-
Abnormal service voltage
ETS 300 132-2
-
Voltage changes due to the regulation of power supply
ETS 300 132-2
-
Electromagnetic compatibility
EN 300 086
-
Safety
EN 60950-1
-
Protections against
- input polarity inversion (fuse) - surge input current (fuse) - continuous short circuit at output with automatic recovery
-
Visual indication
ON = green led active on input primary voltage present
-
Alarm (CM2 connector)
with relay on 9 pin male SUB–D connector Alarm off: 8–9 pin open, 7–9 pin closed Alarm on when Vout decreases ≥ 15%: 8–9 pin closed, 7–9 pin open
-
Fuse
6.3 A medium time 250 Volt
Fig.41 shows connection from IDU 1+0 AL compact version to 24/48 V converter with cable F03489. Fig.42 shows connections from IDU 1+1 AL compact version to 24/48 V converter with cables F03489 and F03278. Warning: connect only 24 Vdc to primary input 24 Vdc IN. Warning: power supply from –48 Vdc must be connected directly to ALC IDU.
64
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
AL
Q3
LCT
IN/OUT
Trib. 5–6–7–8
Warning: connect only 24 Vdc to primary input 24 Vdc IN
R
TEST
Trib. 1–2–3–4
6,3A M 250V
Fuse 6.3 A
ON
48V
–
PS
IN 24Vdc
24 Vdc IN –
G52003
F03489
–
AL - MN.00142.E - 009 + +
Fig.41 - 24/48 V DC/DC converter connections to IDU 1+0
65
+
2A OUT 48Vdc
ALARM
AL
TX RX
2
1
Q3
LCT IN/OUT
24Vdc IN
+
+
Trib. 5–6–7–8
Trib. 1–2–3–4
48Vdc 2A OUT
Warning: connect only 24 Vdc to primary input 24 Vdc IN
R
TEST
ON
–
6,3A M 250V
24 Vdc IN – ALARM
Trib. 13–14–15–16
Trib. 9–10–11–12
6,3A M 250V
1
Fuse 6.3 A
F03278
ON
48V1
–
PS2
PS1
24Vdc IN
24 Vdc IN
+
66 –
Fuse 6.3 A
48V2
– +
+
Fig.42 - 24/48 V DC/DC converter connections to IDU 1+1
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
–
2
F03489
+
48Vdc OUT 2A
1
ALARM
2
Section 3. INSTALLATION
13
INSTALLATION AND PROCEDURES FOR ENSURING ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
13.1
GENERAL
The equipment consists of IDU and ODU(s) units and is mechanically made up of a wired 19" subrack (IDU) and a weather proof metallic container (ODU). The two units are shipped together in an appropriate cardboard box. After unpacking, mechanical installation takes place followed by electrical connections as described in the following paragraphs. Different versions of IDUs and ODUs are pointed out in the following procedures if different steps are requested during installation.
13.2
13.2.1
MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
IDU installation
The front side of the IDU mechanical structure is provided with holes at the sides. This allows to fasten the subrack to a 19" rack by means of four M6 screws. If two or more IDUs are to be mounted, leave at least 1/2 rack unit space (22 mm) between two IDUs to avoid overheating problems.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
67
13.3
ELECTRICAL WIRING
The electrical wiring must be done using appropriate cables thus assuring the equipment complies with electromagnetic compatibility standards. The cable terminates to flying connectors which have to be connected to the corresponding connectors on the equipment front. Position and pin–out of the equipment connectors are available in this section. Tab.13 shows the characteristics of the cables to be used and the flying connector types.
Tab.13 - Characteristics of the cables
Battery
Polarised SUB–D 3W3 female connector
Section of each wire ≥ 2.5 mm2
25 pin SUB–D male connector
120 Ohm balanced four symmetric pairs with shield
Coaxial connector 1.0/2.3
75 Ohm unbalanced with shield
9 pin SUB–D female connector with shielded holder
9 conductor cable with double brass sheath type interconductor DB28.25 or equivalent
input/alarm output
68
a
Type of connector terminating the cable
Tributary signals
a.
Type of cable/conductor
Interconnecting points
LCT
USB connector
USB connector
GND
Faston male type
Section area ≥ 6 mm2
For power cable lenght longer than 20 m. a section of 4 mm2 is required.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
13.4
GROUNDING CONNECTION
Fig.43 and annexed legend show how to perform the grounding connections.
Indoor
3
4
3
4
ODU unit 1
5
IDU unit
7
(+) (–)
2
6
Station ground
Local ground
ground rack Legend 1. IDU grounding point, fast–on type. The cross section area of the cable used must be ≥ 4 mm2. The fast–on is available on both sides of the IDU. 2. ODU grounding bolt. The cross section area of the cable used must be ≥ 16 mm2. 3. IDU–ODU interconnection cable type Celflex CUH 1/4" terminated with N–type male connectors at both sides. 4. Grounding kit type Cabel Metal or similar to connect the shield of interconnection cable. 5. Matching cable (tail) terminated with SMA male and N female connectors. 6. Battery grounding point of IDU to be connected to earth by means of a cable with a section area 2.5 mm2. Length ≤ 10 m. 7. Grounding cords connected to a real earth inside the station. The cross section area of the cable must be = 16 mm2. Fig.43 - Grounding connections
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
69
14
ALC CONNECTIONS
14.1
CONNECTOR USE FOR 1+0/1+1 ALC VERSION
connections are performed through connectors on the IDU front modules (see Fig.44). The connectors are the following: •
Trib IN/OUT: 75 or 120 25–pin SUB–D male connector. For SUB–D connector details Fig.44.
•
LCT: USB connector B type "Receptacle". For connector detail see USB standard.
•
IN/OUT: SUB–D male connector. Connector details refer to Tab.19.
•
Q3: RJ45 connector. Connector details refer to Tab.15.
•
50 Ohm connector for interconnection to ODU2.
•
48V: 3 pin SUB–D 3W3 connector for interconnection to battery.
•
V11: optional service interface. Connector details in Tab.16.
•
V.28: optional service interface. Connector details in Tab.17.
•
RS232 PPP: optional management interface. Connector details inTab.18.
Trib. 1–2–3–4
Q3
LCT
Trib. 9–10–11–12
48V1
IN/OUT
48V2 PS1
TX RX TEST R AL
1 2
1
2 –
PS2
+
Trib. 13–14–15–16
+
Trib. 5–6–7–8
1
2
–
Fig.44 - IDU ALC 1+1 (2x2/4x2/8x2/16x2 Mbit/s)
2
70
SMA kind: max torque 0.5 Nm
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
14.2
STANDARD VERSION CONNECTORS Tab.14 - Tributary connector pin–out (male 25 pin SUB–D) Pin
75 Ohm impedancea
Pin
120 Ohm impedance
1
Tributary 1/5/9/13 input (cold wire)
2
Tributary 1/5/9/13 input (hot wire)
2
Tributary 1/5/9/13 input
14
Tributary 1/5/9/13 input (ground)
14
Ground
15
Tributary 1/5/9/13 output (cold wire)
15
Ground
16
Tributary 1/5/9/13 output (hot wire)
16
Tributary 1/5/9/13 output
3
Tributary 1/5/9/13 output (ground)
3
Ground
4
Tributary 2/6/10/14 input (cold wire)
4
Ground
5
Tributary 2/6/10/14 input (hot wire)
5
Tributary 2/6/10/14 input
17
Tributary 2/6/10/14 input (ground)
17
Ground
18
Tributary 2/6/10/14 output (cold wire)
18
Ground
19
Tributary 2/6/10/14 output (hot wire)
19
Tributary 2/6/10/14 output
6
Tributary 2/6/10/14 output (ground)
6
Ground
7
Tributary 3/7/11/15 input (cold wire)
7
Ground
8
Tributary 3/7/11/15 input (hot wire)
8
Tributary 3/7/11/15 input
20
Tributary 3/7/11/15 input (ground)
20
Ground
21
Tributary 3/7/11/15 output (cold wire)
21
Ground
22
Tributary 3/7/11/15 output (hot wire)
22
Tributary 3/7/11/15 output
9
Tributary 3/7/11/15 output (ground)
9
Ground
10
Tributary 4/8/12/16 input (cold wire)
10
Ground
11
Tributary 4/8/12/16 input (hot wire)
11
Tributary 4/8/12/16 input
23
Tributary 4/8/12/16 input (ground)
23
Ground
24
Tributary 4/8/12/16 output (cold wire)
24
Ground
25
Tributary 4/8/12/16 output (hot wire)
25
Tributary 4/8/12/16 output
12
Tributary 4/8/12/16 output (ground)
12
Ground
13
Ground
13
Ground
Ground
a. The 75 Ohm impedance tributary connector pin–out is referred to the flying connectors to be connected to the equipment connectors.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
71
Tab.15 - 100BaseT connector pin–out for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection Pin
Description
1
Tx+
2
Tx-
3
Rx+
4
--
5
--
6
Rx-
7
--
8
--
Tab.16 - Connector pin–out for 64 kbit/s channel – V.11 interface Pin
Description
1
D-V11-Tx
2
D+V11-Tx
3
C-V11-Tx
4
C+V11-Tx
5
D-V11-Rx
6
D+V11-Rx
7
C-V11-Rx
8
C+V11-Rx
Tab.17 - Connector pin–out – V.28 interface
72
Pin
Description
1
RTS
2
TD
3
DTR
4
DSR
5
GND
6
RD
7
CTS
8
DCD
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Tab.18 - Connector pin–out – RS232 PPP interface Pin
Description
1
DCD
2
RD
3
TD
4
DTR
5
GND
6
DSR
7
RTS
8
CTS
9
NC
Tab.19 - in/out connector pin–out Pin
Description
1
relay
2
NA/NC relay
3
input 01
4
input 02
5
GND
6
NC
7
input 03
8
input 04
9
NC
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
73
15
ALC PLUS CONNECTIONS
15.1
CONNECTOR USE FOR 1+0/1+1 ALC PLUS VERSION
connections are performed through connectors on the IDU front modules (see Fig.45 and Fig.46). The connectors are the following: •
Trib IN/OUT: 75 and 120 50-pin female connector: for SCSI connector details Tab.20, Tab.21
•
LCT: USB connector B type receptable. For connector details see USB standard.
•
IN/OUT: SUB-D male connector. Connector details refer to Tab.27
•
Q3/1 and Q3/2: RJ45 connector. Connector details refer to Tab.22
•
50 Ohm SMA connector for interconnection to ODU
•
48V: SUB-D 3 pin connector for interconnection to battery.
•
V11: service interface. Connector details in Tab.26
•
RS232 management interface. Connector details in Tab.23
Trib: 17-24 Q3/2
Q3/1 A
LCT
RS232
Trib: 25-32
IDU ODU R REM TEST
IN/OUT
+
Trib: 9-16
-
+
FAIL Trib: 1-8
-
WAY SIDE CH1
CH2
2Mb/s
Fig.45 - ALC plus 32E1 (1+1)
IN/OUT
IDU ODU
WAY SIDE
R REM
TEST
CH1
CH2
2Mb/s
+
Q3/1 A
RS232
-
+
Q3/2
LCT
-
FAIL Trib: 1-8
Trib: 9-16
Trib: 17-24
Trib: 25-32
FAIL Trib: 33-40
Trib: 41-48
Trib: 49-53
Fig.46 - ALC plus 32E1 + Ethernet (1+1)
74
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Tab.20 - Tributary IN/OUT - 75 Ohm Pin
75 Ohm
48
Ground A
23
Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 input
50
Ground A
25
Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 output
47
Ground A
22
Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 input
45
Ground A
20
Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 output
42
Ground A
17
Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 input
43
Ground A
18
TributaryTributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 output
40
Ground A
15
Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 input
39
Ground A
14
Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 output
36
Ground B
11
Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 input
37
Ground B
12
Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 output
34
Ground B
9
Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 input
33
Ground B
8
Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 output
29
Ground B
4
Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 input
31
Ground B
6
Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 output
28
Ground B
3
Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 input
26
Ground B
1
Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 output
Note: pin 44 with ground A pins, pin 32 with ground B pins. 25
.........................
1
.........................
50
26
Fig.47 - Pin-out Tributary IN/OUT 50 SCSI
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
75
Tab.21 - Tributary IN/OUT - 120 Ohm
76
Pin
120 Ohm
49
Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 input
23
Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 input
44
Ground A
24
Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 output
25
Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 output
44
Ground A
21
Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 input
22
Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 input
44
Ground A
46
Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 output
20
Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 output
44
Ground A
16
Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 input
17
Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 input
44
Ground A
19
Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 output
18
Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 output
44
Ground A
41
Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 input
15
Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 input
44
Ground A
13
Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 output
14
Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 output
44
Ground A
10
Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 input
11
Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 input
32
Ground B
38
Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 output
12
Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 output
32
Ground B
35
Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 input
9
Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 input
32
Ground B
7
Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 output
8
Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 output
32
Ground B
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
5
Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 input
4
Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 input
32
Ground B
30
Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 output
6
Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 output
32
Ground B
27
Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 input
3
Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 input
32
Ground B
2
Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 output
1
Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 output
32
Ground B
Tab.22 - Q3/1 and Q3/2 100BaseT connector pin-out for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection Pin
Description
1
Tx+
2
Tx-
3
Rx+
4
--
5
--
6
Rx-
7
--
8
--
Tab.23 - Connector pin-out RS232 PPP interface
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Pin
Description
1
DCD (IN)
2
RD (IN)
3
TD (OUT)
4
DTR (OUT)
5
GND
6
Not connected
7
RTS (OUT)
8
CTS (IN)
9
Not connected
77
Tab.24 - CH1 connector pin-out for 9600 bit/s synchronous V.24 interface Pin
Description
1
CKTx
2
TD
3
DTR
4
DSR
5
GND
6
RD9600
7
CKRx
8
DCD
Tab.25 - CH1 connector pin-out for 9600 bit/s asynchronous V.24 interface Pin
Description
1
--
2
TxD
3
DTR
4
DSR
5
GND
6
RxD
7
--
8
DCD
Tab.26 - CH2 connector pin-out for 64 kbit/s channel - V.11 interface
78
Pin
Description
1
D-V11-Tx
2
D+V11-Tx
3
C-V11-Tx
4
C+V11-Tx
5
D-V11-Tx
6
D+V11-Tx
7
C-V11-Tx
8
C+V11-Tx
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Tab.27 - IN/OUT connector pin-out
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Pin
Description
1
C relay - branch 1
2
NA/NC relay - branch 1
3
C relay - branch 2
4
NA/NC relay - branch 2
5
input 01
6
input 02
7
input 03
8
input 04
9
Ground
79
16
INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA
16.1
INSTALLATION KIT
Following installation kits are supplied with the equipment depending on different versions: •
•
•
16.2
80
1+0 standard version -
antisliding strip (see Fig.48)
-
ing plate plus 60–114 mm pole fixing bracket and relevant nuts and bolts (see Fig.49)
-
adapting tools and relevant bolts and nuts for 219 mm pole (see Fig.50)
-
antenna side flange, variable as function of RF frequency (see Fig.51)
-
with ODU fast locking mechanism (see Fig.49)
-
flexible waveguide trunk for connection to antenna (optional) (see Fig.49)
-
kit for ground connection making part of ODU
1+0 Band–it version -
band–it strip (see Fig.53)
-
antenna side flange, variable as function of RF frequency (see Fig.51)
-
with ODU fast locking mechanism (see Fig.49)
-
flexible waveguide trunk for connection to antenna (optional) (see Fig.49)
-
kit for ground connection making part of ODU
1+1 version -
antisliding strip (see Fig.48)
-
ing plate plus pole fixing bracket and relevant nuts and bolts (see Fig.49)
-
adapting tools and relevant bolts and nuts for 219 mm pole (see Fig.50)
-
hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism (see Fig.52)
-
flexible waveguide trunk for connection to antenna (optional (see Fig.49)
-
kit for ground connection making part of the two ODUs.
REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)
•
N. 2 13mm torque wrench or spanner
•
N. 1 15 mm torque wrench or spanner
•
N. 1 17 mm torque wrench or spanner
•
N. 1 3 mm Allen wrench
•
N.1 2.5 mm Allen wrench
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
•
N. 1 7 mm torque wrench
•
Fastening tool UIT19 (Band–it mounting kit only)
16.3
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Installation procedure proceeds according to the following steps: •
1+0 standard: installation onto the pole of the ing plate3
•
1+0 Band–it: installation onto the pole of the ing plate
•
1+1: installation onto the pole of the ing plate
•
Installation of the ODU (common to both 1+0 and 1+1 version)
•
ODU grounding
3
1+0 standard – Installation onto the pole of the ing plate Fig.48 - Mount antislide strip around the pole. The position of the plastic blocks depends on the position of the ing plate (see next step) Fig.49 - Adhere the ing plate to the antisliding strip plastic blocks and then secure it to the pole through the fixing bracket for 60–114 mm pole (see Fig.49). Bolts and nuts are available on the ing plate. Tightening torque must be 32 Nm. Warning: As shown in Fig.50 an adapting kit must be used for the 219 mm pole. It consists of an additional plate to enlarge the standard ing plate dimension and relevant U–bolt for 219 mm pole fixing. Fig.51 - Fix the flexible waveguide to the antenna side flange. Four fixing screws are available the dimensions of which depend on the waveguide type. Tighten progressively and alternatively the four screws with the following torque: Tab.28 - Tightening torque Frequencies
Screw
Tool
Torque
from 18 to 38 GHz
Allen screw M3
Allen key 2.5 mm
1 Nm
up to 15 GHz
Allen screw M4
Allen key 3 mm
2 Nm
Fig.51 – Fix the antenna side flange to the with ODU fast locking mechanism. The flange can be mounted horizontally (as shown in Fig.51) or vertically as function of convenience. Fig.52 – Fix the with ODU fast locking mechanism to the ing plate making use of available bolts and nuts. Fig.52 shows three possible positions. Tightening torque must be 18 Nm.
1+0 Band–it In case of 1+0 ODU installation, a band–it pole mounting kit can be used: through slots (see Fig.53) on the ing plate two metallic bands secure the plate on the pole by means of clips (use Band–it fastening tool). Band characteristics are:
3
•
thickness 0.76 mm
•
width 19 mm
•
steel stainless strip AISI 201/304 (3/4")
In case of 219 mm pole, an adapting kit is supplied for the purpose.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
81
•
clips stainless steel AISI 201/304 (3/4")
Fig.51 – Fix the flexible waveguide to the antenna side flange. Four fixing screws are available the dimensions of which depend on the waveguide type. Tighten progressively and alternatively the four screws with the following torque (see Tab.28).
1+1 – Installation onto the pole of the ing plate Fig.48 – Mount antislide strip around the pole. The position of the plastic blocks depends on the position of the ing plate (see next step) Fig.49 – Position the ing plate to the antisliding strip plastic blocks and then secure it to the pole through the fixing bracket for 60–114 mm pole (see Fig.49). Bolts and nuts are available on the ing plate kit. Tightening torque must be 32 Nm. Fig.54 – Secure the hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism to the ing plate using bolt and nuts available on the plate. Tightening torque must be 18 Nm. Remove the plastic cover from the hybrid flange sides. Warning: Do not remove the foil from the hybrid flange sides. Fig.54 – Fix the flexible waveguide to the antenna side flange. Four fixing screws are available the dimensions of which depend on the waveguide type. Tighten progressively and alternatively the four screws with the following torque: Tab.29 - Tightening torque Frequencies
Screw
Tool
Torque
from 18 to 38 GHz
Allen screw M3
Allen key 2.5 mm
1 Nm
fino a 15 GHz
Allen screw M4
Allen key 3 mm
2 Nm
Warning: It is advisable to shape the waveguide flexible trunk, connecting ODU flange with antenna flange as shown in Fig.57. This avoids possible condensate to be channelled towards the ODU flange.
Installation of the ODU 1. Remove the plastic cover from the ODU flange side. Apply silicon grease e.g. type RHODOSIL PATE 4 to the O–ring of Fig.56. Warning: Do not remove the foil from the flange. 2. Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. 3. Position the ODU body close to the with ODU fast locking mechanism and align ODU side flange (see Fig.56) to antenna side flange (see Fig.51 – 1+0 version) or hybrid side flange (see Fig.54 – 1+1 version). Note: For 1+0 version the ODU can assume positions of Fig.55 depending on the polarisation. 4. With respect to the flange alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30° anti–clockwise and then insert the ODU body into the and search for alignment between reference tooth on the (see Fig.51 – 1+0 version or Fig.54 – 1+1 version) and ODU body reference tooth (see detail Fig.56) 5. When alignment is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until "clack" is heard and the ODU rotation stops. 6. Secure ODU body on the by tightening bolts (1) (see Fig.51 – 1+0 version or Fig.54 – 1+1 version). Tightening torque must be 6 Nm. Final assembly of 1+1 version is shown in Fig.57.
16.4
GROUNDING
The ODU must be connected to ground making reference to details of Fig.58.
82
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
7 mm spanner or Phillips screwdriver
Plastic blocks
Antisliding strip
Fig.48 - Antisliding strip
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
83
Use 17 mm wrench (32Nm torque)
ing plate Use 15 mm wrench (32Nm torque)
Fig.49 - 60–114 mm pole ing plate fixing
84
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Fig.50 - Adapting kit for 219 mm pole
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
85
Flexible waveguide trunk or rigid angular waveguide
Antenna side flange
3 mm Allen key
with ODU fast locking mechanism
Reference tooth Reference tooth
1 1 13 mm wrench 6 Nm torque
Position of antenna side flange
Fig.51 - Mounting possible position
86
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
13 mm wrench (18 Nm torque)
Fig.52 - Possible position of the fast locking mechanism
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
87
Fig.53 - Band–it pole mounting
88
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Use 13 mm wrench (18 Nm torque)
Hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism
Reference tooth
Reference tooth
1 1
RT1
RT2
Fig.54 - ing plate
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
89
Vertical
Horizontal
Fig.55 - Position of the ODU body depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always vertical: handle at the left side.
90
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Reference tooth O–ring ODU side flange
”N
”BNC”
Ground bolt Fig.56 - ODU body reference tooth
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
91
Fig.57 - Final ODU assembly of 1+1 version
92
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
13 mm torque wrench (6 Nm torque)
1 2 3 4 5
1. Bolt 2. Spring washer 3. Flat washer 4. Earth cable collar 5. Flat washer Fig.58 - ODU grounding
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
93
17
INSTALLATION ONTO THE WALL OF THE ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA
17.1
INSTALLATION KIT
Following installation kits are supplied with the equipment depending on different versions: •
•
17.2
94
1+0 version -
wall ing plate with additional surface extension plates (see Fig.59)
-
antenna side flange, variable as function of RF frequency (see Fig.60 )
-
with ODU fast locking mechanism (see Fig.60)
-
flexible waveguide trunk for connection to antenna (optional) (see Fig.60)
-
kit for ground connection making part of ODU
1+1 version -
ing plate with additional surface extension tools (see Fig.59)
-
hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism (see Fig.62)
-
flexible waveguide trunk for connection to antenna (optional (see Fig.60)
-
kit for ground connection making part of the two ODUs.
REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)
•
N. 2 13mm torque wrench
•
N. 1 15 mm torque wrench
•
N. 1 17 mm torque wrench
•
N. 1 3 mm Allen wrench
•
N. 1 2.5 mm Allen wrench
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
17.3
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Installation procedure proceeds according to the following steps: •
Version 1+0: installation onto the wall of the ing plate
•
Version 1+1: installation onto the wall of the ing plate
•
Installation of the ODU (common to both 1+0 and 1+1 version)
•
ODU grounding
1+0 version – Installation onto the wall of the ing plate Fig.59 – Fix on the ing plate the two supplied extension plates to increase the wall surface. Fig.59 – Secure the ing plate on the wall using the more suitable screws. Fig.60 – Fix the flexible waveguide to the antenna side flange. Four fixing screws are available the dimensions of which depend on the waveguide type. Tighten progressively and alternatively the four screws with the following torque: Tab.30 - Tightening torque Frequencies
Screw
Tool
Torque
from 18 to 38 GHz
Allen screw M3
Allen key 2.5 mm
1 Nm
up to 15 GHz
Allen screw M4
Allen key 3 mm
2 Nm
Fig.60 – Fix the antenna side flange to the with ODU fast locking mechanism. The flange can be mounted horizontally (as shown in Fig.60) or vertically as function of convenience. Fig.61 – Fix the with ODU fast locking mechanism to the ing plate making use of available bolts and nuts. Fig.61 shows three possible positions. Tightening torque must be 18 Nm.
1+1 version – Installation onto the wall of the ing plate Fig.59 – Fix on the ing plate the two supplied extension plates to increase the wall surface. Fig.59 – Secure the ing plate on the wall using the more suitable screws. Fig.62 – Secure the hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism to the ing plate using bolt and nuts available on the plate. Tightening torque must be 18 Nm. Remove the plastic cover from the hybrid flange sides. Warning: Do not remove the foil from the hybrid flange sides. Fig.62 – Fix the flexible waveguide to the antenna side flange. Four fixing screws are available the dimensions of which depend on the waveguide type. Tighten progressively and alternatively the four screws with the following torque: Tab.31 - Tightening torque Frequencies
Screw
Tool
Torque
from 18 to 38 GHz
Allen screw M3
Allen key 2.5 mm
1 Nm
up to 15 GHz
Allen screw M4
Allen key 3 mm
2 Nm
Warning: It is advisable to shape the waveguide flexible trunk, connecting ODU flange with antenna flange as shown in Fig.65. This avoids possible condensate to be channelled towards the ODU flange.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
95
Installation of the ODU 1. Remove the plastic cover from the ODU flange side. Apply silicon grease e.g. type RHODOSIL PATE 4 to the O–ring of Fig.64. Warning: Do not remove the foil from the flange. 2. Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. 3. Position the ODU body close to the with ODU fast locking mechanism and align ODU side flange (see Fig.64) to antenna side flange ( see Fig.60 – 1+0 version) or hybrid side flange (see Fig.62 – 1+1 version). Note: For 1+0 version the ODU can assume positions of Fig.63 depending on the polarisation. 4. With respect to the flange alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30° anti–clockwise and then insert the ODU body into the and search for alignment between reference tooth on the (see Fig.60 – 1+0 version or Fig.62 – 1+1 version) and ODU body reference tooth (see detail Fig.64) 5. When alignment is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until "clack" is heard and the ODU rotation stops. 6. Secure ODU body on the by tightening bolts (1) (see Fig. Fig.60 – 1+0 version or Fig.62 – 1+1 version). Tightening torque must be 6 Nm. Final assembly of 1+1 version is shown in Fig.65.
17.4
GROUNDING
The ODU must be connected to ground making reference to details of Fig.66.
96
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Extension plate
13 mm wrench
ing plate
M8 bolt and nut
Fig.59 - Wall ing plate
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
97
Flexible waveguide trunk
Antenna side flange
with ODU fast locking mechanism
Reference tooth Reference tooth
1 1 13 mm wrench 6 Nm torque
Position of antenna side flange
Fig.60 - with ODU fast locking mechanism
98
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Fig.61 - Mounting possible positions
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
99
Use 13 mm wrench (18 Nm torque)
Hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism
Reference tooth
Reference tooth
1 1
RT1
RT2
Fig.62 - Hybride with ODU fast locking
100
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Vertical
Horizontal
Fig.63 - Position of the ODU body depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always vertical: handle at the left side.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
101
Reference tooth O–ring ODU side flange
”N
”BNC”
Ground bolt Fig.64 - ODU body reference tooth
102
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Fig.65 - Final ODU assembly of 1+1 version
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
103
1 2 3 4 5
1. Bolt 2. Spring washer 3. Flat washer 4. Earth cable collar 5. Flat washer Fig.66 - ODU grounding
104
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
18
INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA (KIT V52191, V52192)
18.1
FOREWORD
The installation onto the pole of the ODU with integrated antenna concerns both 1+0 and 1+1 versions.
18.2
INSTALLATION KIT
Following installation kits are supplied with the equipment depending on different versions:
1+0 version •
60 to 114 mm pole mounting kit consisting of: -
centering ring and relevant screws (see Fig.67)
-
antislide strip (see Fig.68)
-
pole system and pole fixing brackets (see Fig.69)
-
ODU with O–ring and devices for ground connection
1+1 version •
18.3
pole mounting kit from 60 to 114 mm for 1+1 consisting of: -
centering ring and relevant screws (see Fig.67)
-
antislide strip (see Fig.68)
-
pole system and pole fixing brackets (see Fig.69)
-
hybrid mechanical body (see Fig.78)
-
polarization twist disk (see Fig.79)
-
2 ODUs with O–rings and devices for ground connection.
REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)
•
N.2 13 mm torque wrench
•
N.1 15 mm torque wrench
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
105
•
N.1 17 mm torque wrench
•
N.1 3 mm Allen wrench
•
N.1 2.5 mm Allen wrench
18.4
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Installation procedure proceeds according with the following steps:
1+0 version 1. installation onto the pole of the system 2. installation of the antenna 3. installation of ODU 4. antenna aiming 5. ODU grounding
1+1 version 1. installation onto the pole of the system 2. installation of the antenna 3. installation of hybrid circuit 4. installation of the two ODUs 5. antenna aiming 6. ODU grounding
18.4.1
Installation onto the pole of the system and the antenna
Fig.67 – Set the antenna in such a position as to be able to operate on its rear side. Locate the five threaded holes around antenna flange. Mount centering ring onto antenna flange and tight it with 3 calibrated bolts. Caution: centering ring should be mounted so that the screws do not stick out. Define if the antenna will be mounted with vertical or horizontal polarization. Check that free drain holes stay at bottom side. Mount bolt type M10x30, in position A leaving it loose of 2 cm approx. With horizontal polarization mount bolt type M10x30 in position D, leaving it loose of 2 cm approx. Fig.68 – Mount antislide strip onto the pole. Place blocks as in Fig.68 following antenna aiming direction. Tighten the strip with screwdriver. Fig.69 – Mount pole ing system with relevant pole fixing brackets following antenna aiming direction as indicated by arrow. Antislide strip should result at the center of ing plate. ing system should lean against antislide clamp with the tooth as in Fig.70. Position the antenna in such a way that bolt in position A or D of Fig.67 cross through hole E of Fig.71. Secure the system to the pole by means of the pole fixing brackets and relevant fixing bolts. Fig.72 – Rotate the antenna body until the remainder three antenna holes coincide with the three holes. Secure the antenna to the by thightening the relevant ing through bolts.
106
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
18.4.2
Installation of ODU
1+0 version 1. Apply silicon grease e.g. RHODOSIL PATE 4" to the O–ring (4) of Fig.75 by protecting finger hands with gloves. 2. Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. The ODU handle can assume position of Fig.73 depending on the polarization. 3. Position the ODU body near the system and align ODU side flange to antenna side flange (see Fig.74). With respect to the flange alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30° anti–clockwise and then insert the ODU body into the and search for alignment between reference tooth on the (see Fig.74) and ODU body reference tooth (see detail of Fig.75). 4. When alignment is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until "clack" is heard and the ODU rotation stops. Fig.76 and Fig.77 show ODU housing final position for vertical and horizontal polarization respectively. 5. Secure ODU body on the system by tightening bolts (1) of Fig.74.
1+1 version Fig.78 – Apply silicon grease, type "RHODOSIL PATE 4" to O–rings (1). Insert O–rings (1) and (6) into twist polarization disk (2). Vertical polarization Fix the disk on hybrid flange placing marker (4), on disk, close to V mark. Horizontal polarization Fix the disk on hybrid flange placing reference (4), on disk, close to H mark. Caution: Twist disk has two planes. Take care of position marker (4) on twist disk. The position of marker (4) plane should be in to hybrid like in figure. Tighten progressively and alternatively four screws (7) with four spring washers (8) with the following torque: Tab.32 Frequencies
Screw
Tool
Torque
from 18 to 38 GHz
Allen screw M3
Allen key 2.5 mm
1 Nm
up to 15 GHz
Allen screw M4
Allen key 3 mm
2 Nm
Fig.79 – Fix hybrid to system with four bolts (1) taking care of RT1/RT2 position shown by labels of Fig.79. Tighten progressively and alternatively four bolts (1).
18.4.3
ODU installation
The installation procedure of the two ODUs is the same. 1. Apply silicon grease e.g. RHODOSIL PATE 4" to the O–ring (4) of the Fig.75.9 by protecting finger hands with gloves. 2. Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. For 1+0 the ODU can assume position of Fig.73 depending on the polarisation. For 1+1 the handle ODU position is always placed at the right side (horizontal polarization). 3. Position the ODU body near the system and align ODU side flange to antenna side flange (see Fig.74). With respect to the flange alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30° anti–clockwise and then insert the ODU body into the and search for alignment between reference tooth on the (see Fig.74) and ODU body reference tooth (see detail of Fig.75).
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
107
4. When alignment is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until "clack" is heard and the ODU rotation stops. Fig.76 and Fig.77 show ODU housing final position for vertical and horizontal polarization respectively for 1+0 version. Fig.80 shows ODU housing final position for 1+1 version. 5. Secure ODU body on the system by tightening bolts (1) of Fig.74.
18.5
ANTENNA AIMING
Antenna aiming for 1+0 version and 1+1 version is the same. The antenna aiming devices allow to perform the following adjustments with respect to the starting aiming position: •
Horizontal
± 15° operating on the nut (3) shown in Fig.81, only after having loosen the nuts (7), (8), (9), (10) of Fig.82.
•
Vertical
± 15° operating on vertical adjustment worm screw (2) shown in Fig.81 only after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of Fig.82 and (4) of Fig.81. For adjustment from 0° to +30° extract nut (1) Fig.82 and position it in hole (4), extract nut (2) Fig.82 and position it in hole (6). Operate on vertical adjustment worm screw (2) after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of Fig.82 and (4) of Fig.81. For adjustment from 0° to –30° extract nut (1) of Fig.82 and position it in hole (3), extract nut (2) of Fig.82 and position it in hole (5). Operate on vertical adjustment worm screw (2) after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of Fig.82 and (4) of Fig.81.
For vertical adjustment some markers, every 10°, are available on . The bigger marker gives 0° starting aiming position. Once the optimum aiming position is obtained, tighten firmly the four nuts (1), (2), (11) of Fig.82 and (4) of Fig.81 for vertical adjustment and the four nuts (7), (8), (9), (10) of Fig.82 for horizontal adjustment. Tighten with 15 mm wrench and 32 Nm torque.
18.6
GROUNDING
See Fig.83. On ODU grounding can be connected with the available bolt spring washer and flat washers as shown.
108
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
A
D
D
C
B
C
A
B
Vertical polarization
Horizontal polarization
3 mm Allen key 2,5 Nm torque
2 3
A C
1
B
1. Antenna 2. Calibrated Allen screw 3. Centering ring Fig.67 - Centering ring position
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
109
2
1
1. Steel belt 2. Plastic blocks Fig.68 - Antislide strip
110
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
1
2 Antenna aiming direction
3
15 mm wrench 32 Nm torque
3
3 1 3
3
3 1. Pole fixing brackets 2. Tooth 3. Bolt 4. Pole system Fig.69 - mount on pole
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
111
Antenna aiming direction
1
1. Tooth Fig.70 - ing plate position
E
Fig.71 - E hole
112
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
B
A
C
D 15 mm wrench 32 Nm torque
A, B, C, D: Bolt slots Fig.72 - Antenna installation on pole
Vertical
Horizontal
Fig.73 - Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always horizontal. Handle at the right side. Vertical Horizontal
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
113
1
13 mm wrench 6 Nm torque
H H
H H 1 1 H H
H H
1
H: Reference tooth Fig.74 - system for ODU housing and reference tooth in evidence
114
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Reference tooth O–ring ODU side flange
”N”
”BNC”
Ground bolt Fig.75 - ODU body reference tooth
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
115
30°
Fig.76 - ODU housing final position for vertical polarization
116
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
30°
30°
Fig.77 - ODU housing final position for horizontal polarization
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
117
7 8 1 2 4
6
5
3
1. O–ring 2. Polarization twist disk 3. Hybrid mechanical body 4. Position marker of twist disk 5. Reference label for twist disk 6. O–ring 7. Allen screws 8. Spring washer Fig.78 - Hybrid and twist disk
118
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
1 RT1 2 1 RT2
13 mm wrench 18 Nm torque
1. Bolts 2. Spring washer Fig.79 - Hybrid mount on pole
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
119
Fig.80 - ODU housing final position for 1+1 version
120
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
4
3 Chiave da 13 mm
1 2 Chiave da 13 mm
Chiave da 15 mm Coppia 32 Nm
1. Marker 2. Vertical adjustment 3. Horizontal adjustment 4. Bolt Fig.81 - Vertical and horizontal adjustments
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
121
15 mm wrench 32 Nm torque
15 mm wrench 32 Nm torque
4
11
7
1
8
3
10 9 5
2
6
15 mm wrench 32 Nm torque
15 mm wrench 32 Nm torque
1, 2, 3, 4. Horizontal aiming block bolts 5, 6, 7. Vertical aiming block bolts 8, 11. Threaded hole for vertical aiming up to -30° 9, 10. Threaded hole for vertical aiming up to +30° Fig.82 - Antenna aiming block
122
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
1 2 3 4 5
1. Bolt 2. Spring washer 3. Flat washer 4. Earth cable collar 5. Flat washer Fig.83 - ODU grounding
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
123
19
INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA (KIT V32307, V32308, V32309)
19.1
FOREWORD
The description concerns pole mounting of ODU, in 1+0 and 1+1 version, using following installation kits: -
V32307
for ODU with frequency from 10 to 13 GHz
-
V32308
for ODU with frequency from 15 to 38 GHz
-
V32309
for ODU with frequency from 7 to 8 GHz
Differences regard the dimensions and the presence of the centring ring (see Fig.84): -
V32307
centring ring for antenna flange from 10 to 13 GHz
-
V32308
centring ring for antenna flange from 15 to 38 GHz
-
V32309
no centring ring (and relevant screws).
19.2
INSTALLATION KIT
Following installation kits are supplied with the equipment depending on different versions.
1+0 version •
60 to 129 mm pole mounting kit: -
centring ring and relevant screws
-
pole system plus antenna (already assembled) and pole fixing brackets
-
1+0 ODU and relevant screws
-
ODU with O–ring and devices for ground connection
1+1 version •
124
60 to 129 mm pole mounting kit: -
centring ring and relevant screws
-
pole system plus antenna (already assembled) and pole fixing brackets
-
1+0 ODU
-
hybrid and relevant screws
-
polarization twist disk and relevant screws
-
2 ODUs with O–rings and devices for ground connection.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
19.3
REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)
•
N.1 2.5 mm Allen wrench
•
N.1 3 mm Allen wrench
•
N.1 5 mm Allen wrench
•
N.1 6 mm Allen wrench
•
N.1 13 mm spanner
•
N.2 17 mm spanner.
19.4
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Installation procedure is listed below:
1+0 version 1. antenna polarization 2. installation of the centring ring on the antenna 3. installation of 1+0 ODU 4. installation onto the pole of the assembled structure 5. installation of ODU 6. antenna aiming 7. ODU grounding
1+1 version 1. antenna polarization 2. installation of the centring ring on the antenna 3. installation of 1+0 ODU 4. installation onto the pole of the assembled structure 5. installation of hybrid 6. installation of ODUs 7. antenna aiming 8. ODU grounding.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
125
19.5
19.5.1
1+0 MOUNTING PROCEDURES
Setting antenna polarization
Fig.84 – Set the antenna in such a position to operate on its rear side. Locate the four 2.5 mm Allen screws around the antenna flange. Unscrew them (use 2.5 mm Allen wrench) and position the antenna flange according on: horizontal wave guide → vertical polarization, vertical wave guide → horizontal polarization. Screw again the four Allen screws (torque = 1Nm).
19.5.2
Installation of the centring ring on the antenna
Fig.84 - Set the antenna in such a position to operate on its rear side. Locate the three holes around the antenna flange. Mount the centring ring onto antenna flange and tight it with the 3 Allen screws M4 (use 3mm Allen wrench, torque = 2Nm) .
19.5.3
Installation of 1+0 ODU
Fig.84 - Mount the onto assembled structure (pole system plus antenna) using the four 6 mm Allen screws (use 6 mm Allen wrench, torque = 18Nm). Two of the four screws, diagonally opposed, must be mounted with the two bushes around.
19.5.4
Installation onto the pole of the assembled structure
Fig.84 - Mount the assembled structure on the pole using the two pole fixing brackets and the four 17 mm screws (use 17 mm spanner, torque = 13Nm); the heads of the screws are inserted on the antenna side, the four nuts and the springs between nut and brackets are inserted on bracket side.
19.5.5
Installation of ODU (on 1+0 )
Fig.85 - Apply silicon grease (e.g. RHODOSIL PATE 4") on the O–ring by protecting fingers with gloves. Fig.86 - Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. The handle can assume the positions shown in the figure depending on the polarization. Position the ODU body near the and align the wave guide of the ODU to the Wave guide of the antenna: respect to the position of wave guide alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30° counter–clockwise and then insert the ODU body into the and search for matching between reference tooth on the (see Fig.87) and reference tooth on the ODU body. Fig.88 - When alignment of the references teeth is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until "clack" is heard and rotation is stopped. In figure are shown ODU final position for both polarizations. Fig.87 - When ODU positioning is over, secure ODU body on the by tightening bolts (use 17mm spanner, torque = 6Nm).
126
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
19.5.6
Antenna aiming
Antenna aiming procedure for 1+0 version or 1+1 version is the same. Horizontal aiming: ±5° operating on the 17 mm nut shown in Fig.89 with a 17 mm spanner, only after having loosen the two 17 mm nut on the pivot. Vertical aiming: ±20° operating on the 13 mm nut shown in Fig.89 with a 13 mm spanner, only after having loosen the three 13 mm nut on the pole . Once optimum position is obtained, tighten firmly all the nuts previously loosen.
19.5.7
ODU grounding
ODU grounding is achieved with: •
M8 screw without washers
•
M6 screw with washer
as shown in Fig.90.
19.6
1+1 MOUNTING PROCEDURES
In further page are explained all the mounting step not already discussed in " 1+0 MOUNTING PROCEDURES"
19.6.1
Installation of Hybrid
Fig.91 – The polarization twist disk must be always fixed on hybrid flange. Apply silicon grease (e.g. RHODOSIL PATE 4") on the O–rings by protecting fingers with gloves. Bring the polarization twist disk with the position marker down. Insert the O–ring into polarization twist disk. Vertical polarization: fix the twist disk on hybrid flange placing the marker of the disk towards V mark. Horizontal polarization: fix the twist disk on hybrid flange placing the marker of the disk towards H mark. Tighten progressively and alternatively the four screws and spring washer with following torque: Tab.33 Frequencies
Screw
Tool
Torque
from 18 to 38 GHz
Allen screw M3
Allen key 2.5 mm
1 Nm
up to 15 GHz
Allen screw M4
Allen key 3 mm
2 Nm
Fig.92 - Fix hybrid body to 1+0 with four 13 mm bolts (use 13 mm spanner, torque = 18 Nm), tighten progressively and alternatively the bolts.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
127
19.6.2
Installation of ODUs (on hybrid for 1+1 version)
For both ODUs. Fig.85 – Apply silicon grease e.g. RHODOSIL PATE 4" to the O–ring by protecting fingers with gloves. Fig.86 – Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. The handle can assume the positions shown in the figure depending on the polarization. Position the ODU body near the and align the wave guide of the ODU to the wave guide of the hybrid: respect to the position of wave guide alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30° counter–clockwise and then insert the ODU body into the . For 1+1 system the handle of the ODU is always positioned on the right. The polarization twist disk on the hybrid matches the antenna polarization. Fig.93 – When alignment of the reference teeth is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until "clack" is heard and the rotation stops. In figure are shown ODUs final position. Fig.89 – When ODU positioning is over, secure ODU body on the by tightening bolts (use 17 mm spanner, torque = 6 Nm). Warning: Internal codes (e.g. installation items, antennas, PCB) are here reported only as example. The Manufacturer reserves the right to change them without any previous advice.
128
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Four 13mm screws Centring ring (not present in V32309) Three 3mm Allen screws (not present in V32309)
Antenna
1+0 Two bushes Fig.84 - 1+0 pole mounting
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
129
Reference tooth O–ring ODU wave guide
”N” ”BNC” Ground bolt Fig.85 - ODU body reference tooth
130
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Vertical
Horizontal
Fig.86 - Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always horizontal. Handle at the right side.
3 1 2
1 5 4
4 1 5
1 2 3 1. 6 mm Allen screw 2. Bush (diagonally placed) 3. 17 mm Tightening bolts (max torque = 6 Nm) 4. Reference point for horizontal polarization 5. Reference point for vertical polarization Fig.87 - 1+0
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
131
1+0 ODU with handle on the right: horizontal polarization
1+0 ODU with handle on the right: vertical polarization Fig.88 - ODU housing final position for both polarization
132
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Horizontal aiming: two 17mm block screws
Vertical aiming: three 13mm block screws Pole
17mm nut for horizontal adjustment of antenna
Internal 5mm Allen screw for vertical adjustment of antenna
Fig.89 - Antenna aiming
1 2 3 4 5
1. Bolt 2. Spring washer 3. Flat washer 4. Earth cable collar 5. Flat washer Fig.90 - ODU grounding
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
133
7 8 1 2 4
6
5
3
1. O–ring 2. Polarization twist disk 3. Hybrid mechanical body 4. Position marker of twist disk 5. Reference label for twist disk 6. O–ring 7. Allen screws 8. Spring washer Fig.91 - Hybrid and twist disk
134
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Fig.92 - Hybrid installation
Fig.93 - 1+1 ODUs installation
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
135
20
INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE 4 GHZ ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA (KIT V32323)
20.1
INSTALLATION KIT
1+0 version •
Anti–sliding bracket
•
ODU pole and relevant screws
1+0 version •
Anti–sliding bracket
•
ODU pole and relevant screws
•
hybrid and relevant screws
•
Hybrid–ODU connecting cables
20.2
REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)
•
N.2 13 mm spanner
•
N.1 15 mm spanner
•
N.1 17 mm spanner.
20.3
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Installation procedure is listed below: •
1+0/1+1 version: pole installation of the
•
1+1 version: installation of the hybrid on the
•
installation of the ODU on the
•
ODU grounding and connection of the cables to the hybrid and antenna
1+0/1+1 version: pole installation of the Fig.94 - Install anti–sliding device (1) around the pole. The position of the plastic blocks depends on the position of the (2) and of the relevant hooking pin (3).
136
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Hook the to the plastic blocks by means of the hooking pin. Insert to the four screws (4) in the relevant holes, set the two brackets (5) and clamp them around the pole tightening the four nuts (6) (tightening torque = 32 Nm). Cover the projecting bits of the screws using the relevant red covers (7). The two holes (8) house the two tightening screws of the hybrid (only for 1+1 version).
1+1 version: hybrid installation on the Fig.95 – Set the hybrid (1) on the (2) in such a way that the connectors are downward and that the holes on the lower side of the hybrid match with the corresponding holes (8) of the Fig.94. Insert the two screws (3) (tightening torque = 7.3 Nm) and tighten the hybrid to the .
ODU installation on the Locate the part of the more suitable for the installation of the ODU: both the parts can be used (1+0 version). Fig.95 – Locate the four slots (4) on the (2). Fig.96 – Keeping the knob of the ODU1 downward, partially screw the two screws (2) into the two upper holes of the ODU, on N connector side. Hook the heads of the two screws (2) of the Fig.96 into the slots (4) of the Fig.95. Insert also the remaining screws (2) into the holes (3). Tighten all the four screws (2) (tightening torque = 7.3 Nm). Put the sun–cover (5) over the ODU (1) and fix it to the knob of the ODU by means of the supplied strip. In case of 1+1 version, repeat the whole procedure for the second ODU.
ODU grounding and connection of the cables to hybrid and antenna Fig.97 – Tighten the grounding cable of each ODU by means of grounding bolt (1) (tightening torque = 7.3 Nm) and the relevant washer. For the connection of the RF cable follow the label on the bottom of the hybrid: ODU1 (RT1) is that connected to RIM1 of IDU, ODU 2 (RT2) is that connected to RIM2 of IDU.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
137
7 6
5 2 7 6 3
4
1 5
4
8 4 4 Fig.94 - Pole installation of the
138
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
4 4
1
2
3
Fig.95 - Installation of the hybrid on the pole (only for 1+1 version)
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
139
5
1 3
2
Fig.96 - Installation of the ODU on the
140
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
RT2
1 RT1
1
Fig.97 - ODU grounding and connection of the cables to hybrid and antenna
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
141
142
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Section 4. LINE-UP
21
LINE–UP OF THE RADIO HOP
21.1
LINE–UP OF THE RADIO HOP
The line–up consists of the following steps: •
on site radio terminal installation (perform connections and ODU installation as described in the relevant chapters)
•
equipment switch–on (operate the ON/OFF switch on the IDU front)
•
antenna alignment for maximum received RF signal level
•
network element configuration
•
check measurements.
21.1.1
Antenna alignment and received field measurement
Purpose of antenna alignment is to maximize the RF received signal level. Proceed as follows: •
connect a multimeter to BNC connector on the ODU for AGC measurement
•
adjust antenna pointing as soon as the maximum AGC voltage value is achieved.
The relationship between AGC voltage and received field is shown by Fig.98. The received field level has a tolerance of ±4 dB in the full temperature range.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
143
21.1.2
Network element configuration
A factory default address is assigned to each network element that must normally be reconfigured on site following the network rules. To this purpose it is required to connect the PC, where the SCT/LCT program has been installed, to the network interfaces. This has to be done via USB or Ethernet cable. Warning: the checks that follow require a good knowledge of the program use. The description of each menu and relevant windows are given by the program itself as help on line. Run the program and perform the connection to equipment by choosing from menu "Option" the connection made via USB cable. Perform the to the equipment by entering: •
Equipment IP address4
•
ID (default: SYSTEM)
•
: (default: SIAEMICR)
Proceed to program what above mentioned following this path: •
IP Address: select menu Equipment from the menu bar and then Communication Setup → Port Configuration. Enter the required port addresses in the available communication ports. Press ? for details.
•
Routing Table and Default Gateway: select menu Equipment from the menu bar and then Communication Setup → Routing table: enter the routes or default gateway if necessary. Press ? for details. Warning: the routing policy depends on the routing type: manual IP/OSPF/IS–IS. The relevant routing rules must be normally given by network .
•
Remote Element Table: select menu Tools from menu bar and then Subnetwork Configuration Wizard. Station name and remote element table must be assigned following description of the contextual help on–line (?).
•
Agent IP Address: select menu Equipment and then Properties. Assign the address in accordance to the address of the remote element you want to reach.
21.1.3
Radio checks
It is advisable to perform the following measurements to check the correct operation of the radio hop: •
Transmitted power
•
Received power
•
RF frequency
•
BER measurement
All these checks make use of the SCT/LCT program. •
•
Transmitted power, received RF level, RF frequency -
Run SCT/LCT program and then perform the connection to the equipment you want to check.
-
Make double click on the select equipment until main RADIO PDH–AL window is shown.
-
On top of the window Tx/Rx power and frequency values are displayed. In case of Tx power and frequency setup proceed to Branch 1/2 and Power/Frequencies submenus.
BER measurement -
4
144
Run SCT/LCT program and then perform the connection to the equipment you want to check.
If the connection is made via USB cable, the IP address is automatically achieved.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
-
Make double click on the selected equipment until main RADIO PDH–AL window is shown.
-
On the left side select BER1/2 measure. In alternative it is possible to use the PRBS function if one or 2 Mbit/s line is free.
-
Perform the BER measurement and check that values comply with the requirements.
V 3 2,625 2,25 1,875 1,5 1,125 0,75
dBm
0 –100
–80 –70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 Fig.98 - Detected voltage versus Rf received signal
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
145
22
LINE–UP OF ETHERNET TRAFFIC (FOR IDU WITH ETHERNET MODULE ONLY)
22.1
GENERAL
This paragraph deals with line–up of V12252 Ethernet module with details of SCT/LCT program related only to Ethernet application. Assuming that the radio link is already in service, with correct frequency, output power and correct antenna alignment, the line up procedure for different kinds of connection set up of a radio link AL, equipped with LIM Ethernet/2 Mbit/s module, is hereafter described: 1. Local Lan–1 port to remote Lan–1 port connection LAN per port, see Fig.99 2. Local Lan–1 port to remote Lan–1 port connection with only VLANs 3. 3 to 1 port connections, see Fig.111. Settings here below are intended to be done both into local and remote radio equipment.
22.2
LOCAL LAN–1 PORT TO REMOTE LAN–1 PORT (TRANSPARENT CONNECTION LAN PER PORT)
Settings for Untagged and Tagged Traffic
switch
switch port 1
Lan–1 Lan–2
Lan–1
port 1 Radio
Lan–2
Radio
Lan–3
Lan–3
Nx2 Mbit/s
Nx2 Mbit/s Local
Remote
Fig.99 - Local Lan–1 port to remote Lan–1 port connection The line–up of Ethernet traffic is made with the help of SCT/LCT program. Please refer to Fig.100. First selection is Ethernet throughput and modulation scheme, in this example we select 16 Mbit/s and modulation 16QAM (max throughput and modulation scheme depend on of licence provided by Siae Microelettronica). Select configuration 1+0 or 1+1 according system requirements. Inside LCT, select Tributary window. If 2 Mbit/s tributaries are needed, inside the Tributary window it is possible to activate a 2 Mbit/s input/output on the front . When the activation of required 2 Mbit/s tributaries is completed, all the others 2 Mbit/s streams are automatically used for the Ethernet traffic. For instance with a 8x2 Mbit/s capacity, if we use two 2 Mbit/s the capacity assigned to Ethernet circuits is automatically set to 6x2 = 12 Mbit/s full duplex.
146
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Fig.100 - Selection of Ethernet Throughput See Fig.101 for General settings for the switch. All the used ports must be Enabled, so enable Lan–1 and Internal Port, see Fig.102. The other ports should be disabled. The correct cable crossover arrangement must be selected too (see Fig.102). At the end of Line–up, enable LLF if needed. For Untagged traffic, connections are done with Lan per port selections. Referring to Fig.103 incoming traffic at Lan–1 exits at Internal Port and into Fig.105 incoming traffic at Internal Port exits at Lan–1 port. This connection are done for all Untagged traffic and all Tagged packets with Vlan Id not described into Vlan Configuration Table. If Vlan Configuration Table is blank all Tagged traffic follows the rules of Lan per port. Possible selections of Ingress Filtering Check: 1. Disable 802.1q: no check of Virtual Lan tag is made and all packets follow Lan per port settings 2. Fallback: if Tagged packets have their Vlan Id into Vlan Configuration Table they follow the connection described into the table, otherwise they follow the Lan per port settings as Untagged packets 3. Secure: no Untagged packet transits; only Tagged packets with Vlan Id listed into the table can transit. For all configuration, Disable 802.1 should be selected. With Egress Mode as Unmodified the outgoing packets at Lan–1 port exit Untagged or Tagged exactly as they were Untagged or Tagged at the incoming port.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
147
Link Loss Forwarding Histeresys
Output policy for Tagged packets: Level 2 priority, if used, defined for all the ports for incoming packets already Tagged
Click here for Port mapping and VLAN configuration table Fig.101 - Switch general settings
Fig.102 - Lan–1 interface settings
148
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Fig.103 - Vlan settings for Lan–1
Incoming Untagged packets at Lan–1 are sent into output part queue following this selection. In this example packets are inserted into queue 0.
Fig.104 - Priority setting for Lan–1 and Internal Port
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
149
With Priority disabled no check is done into 802.1p priority Tag. All types of packets go into Default Priority Queue.
Fig.105 - Vlan settings for Internal Port
Fig.106 - Vlan Configuration Table
150
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
22.3
LOCAL LAN–1 PORT TO REMOTE LAN–1 PORT (WITH VLANs)
Settings are done to transfer only Tagged traffic within Vlans. We want that Vlan 701, 702, 710 and 1, 2, 3 can into the radio link and all the other Tagged or Untagged packets should be blocked. The line up of Ethernet module is made with the help of LCT/SCT program. Please refer to Fig.100. First selection is Ethernet throughput and modulation scheme, in this example we select 16 Mbit/s and modulation 16QAM (max throughput and modulation scheme depends on of licence provided by Siae Microelettronica). Select configuration 1+0 or 1+1 according system requirements. Inside LCT, select tributary window. If 2 Mbit/s tributaries are needed, inside the tributary window it is possible to activate a 2 Mbit/s input/output on the front . When the activation of required 2 Mbit/s tributaries is completed, all the others 2 Mbit/s streams are automatically used for the Ethernet traffic. for instance with a 16 Mbit/s capacity if we use two 2 Mbit/s the capacity assigned to ethernet circuits is automatically set to 16– 2x2 = 12 Mbit/s full duplex. See Fig.101 for general settings for the switch. All the used ports must be enabled, so enable Lan–1 and Internal Port, see Fig.102. The other ports should be disabled. The correct Cable crossover arrangement must be selected too. Enable LLF if needed, only at the end of line up. Vlan settings for Lan–1 and Internal Port should be like in Fig.107 with Ingress Filtering Check as Secure and Engress Mode as Tagged. With this setting only Tagged packets with Vlan ID listed into the Vlan Configuration Table can transit. All Untagged packets are blocked at the incoming port and outgoing Tagged packets don’t change. A packet with Vlan ID XX can enter into the switch only if Incoming Port (Ingress port) is a member of the Vlan XX, same packet will exit only from ports (Engress Port) which are of Vlan XX. Vlan hip is described into Vlan Configuration Table. A port can be member of no one, one or more Vlans. See Fig.108 for Vlan Configuration Table settings for our example.
Fig.107 - Virtual Lan input and output settings at Lan–1 port
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
151
Fig.108 - Vlan Configuration Table with some Vlans
Tagged incoming packet can be treated with FIFO policy or on the basis of their 802.1p priority tag and ToS/DS value for IP packets. There are 4 queue at each output port. The decision about to which output queue to send a packet is defined into Ethernet switch window selections for 802.1p tag. Into Ethernet switch window it is possible to select ToS/DS button to open window ToS/DS, in this window each incoming ToS/DS value is associated with an output queue so it is possible to change the priority of the incoming packet. When no info on priority is available, the packet is sent to Default Priority Queue using FIFO policy. Into Lan–1 window select Priority (802.1q), into priority box there are some selections: with "Disable" switch doesn’t look at priority tag; with 802.1p switch looks at Tag 802.1p only; with IpToS for IP packets only switch looks to ToS/DS identifier (into IP frame) only; with 802.1p – IpToS switch looks first to 802.1p tag and secondly to ToS/DS, see Fig.110; with IpToS–802.1p switch looks first to ToS/DS and secondly to Tag 802.1p. Note: with IpToS switch looks to IP packet and ToS/DS doesn’t matter if the packets are tagged with 802.1p or not. In this example incoming tagged are tagged and it is necessary to transfer the packets with no change so they must exit from output ports tagged, see Fig.109 and Fig.110.
152
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Fig.109 - Add a new Vlan ID to Vlan Configuration Table with output tagged
Incoming Untagged packets at Lan–1 are sent into output part queue following this selection. In this example packets are inserted into queue 0.
Fig.110 - Layer 2 and Layer 3 priority management
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
153
22.4
3 TO 1 PORT CONNECTIONS
switch
switch port 1
Lan–1 Lan–2
AL radio
Lan–3
Lan–1
port 1
Lan–2
AL radio
Lan–3 Nx2 Mbit/s
Nx2 Mbit/s
Remote
Local Fig.111 - 3 to 1 port connections
In this example 3 local port must communicate with corresponding remote ports. All the ports share the same radio channel but traffic originated and directed to Lan1 should be kept separated from traffic from Lan2 and Lan3 and viceversa. Lan–1 to Lan–1 connection should transfer tagged packets with Vlan 1, 701, 760 and untagged packets. Unspecified tagged packets must be stopped. Lan–2 and Lan–3 have the same requirements. For all connections IP packets with high priority TOS should transferred at minimum delay.
22.5
3 TO 1 PORT CONNECTIONS, SETTINGS FOR UNTAGGED TRAFFIC
The line–up of Ethernet traffic is made with the help of LCT/SCT. Please refer to Fig.99. First selection is Ethernet throughput and modulation scheme, in this example we select 16 Mbit/s and modulation 16QAM (max throughput and modulation scheme depend on of licence provided by Siae Microelettronica). Select configuration 1+0 or 1+1 according system requirements. Inside LCT, select Tributary window. If 2 Mbit/s tributaries are needed, inside the tributary window it is possible to activate a 2 Mbit/s input/output on the front . When the activation of required 2 Mbit/s tributaries is completed, all the others 2 Mbit/s streams are automatically used for the Ethernet traffic. For instance with a 8x2 Mbit/s capacity if we use two 2 Mbit/s the capacity assigned to Ethernet circuits is automatically set to 6x2 = 12 Mbit/s full duplex. Vlan Configuration Table will be defined in order to group traffic from Lan–1, Lan–2, Lan–3 to Port1. All the used ports must be Enabled. Untagged traffic transits only if the selection for Ingress Filtering Check is disabled at each input port and a separated Vlan for Untagged traffic is set up for each port. See Fig.101, Fig.102, Fig.111, Fig.112 and Fig.113. Each port of the switch must be associated with a different Default VLAN ID in order to maintain the traffic coming from different separated LANs, Lan–1 with default VID 3301, Lan–2 with default VID 3302, Lan–3 with default VID 3303, for Lan–1 see Fig.113 and Fig.114. The correct Cable Crossover arrangement must be selected too.
154
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Fig.112 - Input and output setting for VLANs at Lan–1 port
Fig.113 - Output port properties for VLAN 3301
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
155
Vlan 3301, 3302, 3303 are allowed to exit at Port1 with tags (Tagged). Different default Tag’s allow to keep separate the traffic from Lan1, Lan2 and Lan3 exiting at Port 1. At the remote end the traffic is split and forwarded from Port1 to Lan1, Lan 2 and Lan3 without Tag to preserve the original format.
Default VID assigned by to each port Fig.114 - Typology 3 to 1, Virtual Lan Configuration With the above settings inside the VLAN configuration Table only Untagged traffic is forwarded accross the bridge. The same settings should be done inside the remote equipment. The above example shows the Virtual Lan Configuration Table in case of a link carrying the traffic of 3 independent LAN’s connected to Lan–1, Lan– 2, Lan–3, which is split at the remote end among the outgoing Lan–1, Lan–2, Lan–3 ports, while using a common radio link. To prioritize some IP packets with high ToS/DS value it is possible to open PToS/DS window from Ethernet switch window and select the values of ToS for which the packet is sent to high priority Queue, see Fig.115.
TOS value description
DS value description Packets with AF43 priority level will go into Queue 3 at all ports
AF43 now goes to Queue 3, with this button AF43 will go to Queue 2 Fig.115 - Output Queue selection on the basis of TOS/DS priority
156
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
22.6
3 TO 1 PORT CONNECTIONS, SETTINGS FOR TAGGED AND UNTAGGED TRAFFIC
If we want VLAN with Tag 701, 702 and 703 to transit between Lan–1 and Port–1 it is necessary to define Port 1 and Lan 1 as of VLAN1, 701, 760 (see Fig.116 for VLAN 701 and do the same for VLAN1, 760). The VLAN Configuration Table will look like Fig.117. For Lan–2 and Lan–3 we cannot use the same Vlan if we want to maintain traffic from Lan 1, 2, 3 separated. We must change the number of incoming Vlan for instance of 1, 701, 760 use 2001, 2701, 2760 for Lan– 2 and 3001, 3701, 3760 for Lan–3. Connected equipment to Lan–2 port should be reprogrammed to use Vlan 2001, 2701, 2760. Connected equipment to Lan–3 port should be reprogrammed to use Vlan 3001, 3701, 3760. To prioritize Ip packets with high ToS/DS value it is possible to open PToS/DS window from Ethernet switch window and select the values of ToS for which the packet is sent to high priority Queue 3, see Fig.115. The same should be done inside the remote equipment.
Fig.116 - Output properties of VLAN 701
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
157
Fig.117 - Typology 3 to 1, Virtual Lan Configuration Table with Vlan
22.7
3 TO 1 CONNECTIONS: EXAMPLES OF PRIORITY MANAGEMENT
Example 1: To assign to Lan–1 and Lan–3 low priority and to Lan–2 high priority, while wanting Tagged and Untagged to be treated in a fair manner on each queue do as follow: select Priority Disable for Lan–1, Lan–2 and Lan–3; select Default Priority Queue equal to Queue 0 for lan–1 and Lan–3 (see Fig.104). Select Default Priority Queue equal to Queue 3 for Lan–2 (as in Fig.118). Outgoing Untagged packets will take priority tag defined into input port, in this case 0. Tagged frames keep their tag. Example 2: Wanting tagged frames to be treated according their actual priority and untagged packets with low priority, all inputs should be configured as in Fig.Fig.119. Layer 2 Priority assignment is not modified if inside the second folder of the Lan–X (1, 2, 3) configuration window Untagged Frame Egress Mode = Unmodified is selected as in Fig. Fig.120.
158
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Impostando questa cartella, i pacchetti senza tag arrivati alla Lan–2 sono trasmessi alle Code Porte di output. In questo esempio tutti i pacchetti entranti nella Lan–2 vengono inseriti nella Coda di output 3 delle porte di output. Priorità di Input: quando non è selezionato Disable, le trame con tag sono trasmesse alle code 0,1,2,3 secondo il valore di priorità porta di destinazione; con Disable selezionato per questa porta la commutazione usa la Default Priority Queue per trame con tag e senza tag, e senza modifica reale di tag nelle trame entranti con tag. Fig.118 - Queue selection
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
159
Fig.119 - Management of tagged frames according with their priority tag
160
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Fig.120 - Incoming packets at Lan–1 will exit to other ports unchanged according their incoming status.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
161
162
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Section 5. MAINTENANCE
23
PERIODICAL CHECKS
23.1
GENERAL
Periodical checks are used to check correct operation of the radio equipment without the presence of any alarm condition. The SCT/LCT programs running on the PC are used for the purpose.
23.2
CHECKS TO BE CARRIED OUT
The following checks must be carried out: •
check of the transmitted power;
•
check of the received field strength (the reading must match the value resulting from hop calculations);
•
check of bit error rate and hop performances.
For checking procedures, please refer to SCT/LCT program and relevant help–on line.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
163
24
TROUBLESHOOTING
24.1
GENERAL
The AL equipment consists of the following replaceable parts: •
IDU
•
ODU
Purpose of the troubleshooting is to pinpoint the faulty part and replace it with spare. Warning: the replacement of a faulty IDU with spare causes the spare IDU to be re–programmed. To the purpose refer to chapter 19 for the relevant procedure.
24.2
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE
Troubleshooting starts as soon as one of the following alarm condition: IDU/ODU/REM is switched ON on the IDU from (see Fig.121) or alarm messages are displayed by managers SCT/LCT. Two methods are used to troubleshoot the cause of fault: •
loop facilities
•
alarm message processing using the manager SCT/LCT
24.2.1
Loop facilities
The equipment is provided with different loops that help locate the faulty part. Warning: the majority of loops causes the traffic to be lost. The available loops are the following:
164
•
local tributary loops: usually used to test the cables interfacing the equipment upstreams
•
remote tributary loops: usually used to test the two direction link performance making use of an unused 2 Mbit/s signal.
•
baseband loop: it permits to test the LIM circuits
•
IDU loop: it permits to test the complete IDU (optional)
•
RF loop: it permits to test the complete radio terminal.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
24.2.2
Alarm messages processing
When an alarm condition occurs, the equipment generates a number of alarm messages that appear on the SCT windows ie: log history area and equipment view current alarm. Investigation on the alarm message meaning permits to troubleshoot the faulty module.
Alarm message organisation The alarms (traps) are organized as alarm grouping relevant to a specific functions performed by the equipment. The alarm grouping is available only in the view current alarm submenu. What follows is the list of the alarm grouping: •
COMMON – alarms which are not related to a specific part of the equipment but relevant to the link as EOC radio link alarm or link telemetry fail. If these alarms are ON the link is lost. Investigation must be made on a possible bad propagation or equipment failure. See the condition of the others alarm grouping.
•
LIM – This grouping may generate alarms for the following causes:
•
-
external fault: tributary loss signal
-
LIM failure: i.e. multiplexer/demultiplexer failure or modulator/demodulator failure.
RIM – This grouping may generate alarms for the following causes:
•
-
external fault: demodulator fail alarm and local ODU alarm are generated when the ODU becomes faulty.
-
RIM failure – power supply alarm along with cable short/open alarms or modulator/demodulator alarms are activated.
RT – This grouping may generate alarms for the following causes: -
external fault: Rx power low alarm is generated given by a bad propagation or by a faulty remote terminal.
-
ODU failure: PSU fail alarm or RF VCO alarm or RT IF alarm is activated. If this happens, replace the ODU.
•
UNIT – This grouping generates alarms when one of the units, the equipment consists of, is faulty or does not respond to the controller polling. Replace the faulty unit.
•
CONTROLLER – There is not an alarm message relevant to a controller module failure. An alarm condition causes Led IDU to steady lights up.
Trib. 1–2–3–4
Q3
LCT
48V
IN/OUT
PS TEST R
AL Trib. 5–6–7–8
– +
Fig.121 - IDU front
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
165
25
EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION /SAVE/ . PARAMETER MODIFICATION AND CREATION OF VIRTUAL CONFIGURATIONS.
25.1
SCOPE
This chapter describes the procedure to create configuration files. Equipment configuration files must be used in case of replacing a faulty IDU with a spare. To this purpose it is necessary to , from each network element, equipment configurations and save them on three configuration files. It is advisable to do it upon the first installation. Configuration file on the spare CONTROLLER permits to restore previous operating condition. It is also possible to create virtual configuration without being connected to equipment.
25.2
PROCEDURE
To configure the spare IDU the following must be ed/saved on the file/ed: •
General equipment configuration
•
Addresses and routing table
•
Remote element table
To do it, run the SCT/LCT program (see relevant documentation available on line) until "Subnetwork Craft Terminal" application window is displayed.
25.2.1
General equipment configuration
and save 1. Select Open Configuration Template from Tools menu following this path: Tools → Equipment Configuration Wizard → File → Open Configuration Template. The system will show Template Selection window. 2. Choose from Template Selection window the type of equipment and version (for instance radio PDH AL: 2x2, 4x2, 8x2, 16x2 Mbit/s) from which you want to make the . 3. Press OK. The system will display the Configuration Wizard window referring to the selected type of equipment and version (example: radio PDH AL: 2x2, 4x2, 8x2, 16x2 Mbit/s) 4. Press push button and select Get Current Type Configuration from Equipment. The system will display the Configuration File window. The window will show the equipment list.
166
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
5. Select the equipment you wish to a configuration file from (normally the local equipment) by activating the relevant box. 6. Press OK. The system displays the Communication Status window where is pointed out: -
the operation status: in progress/complete.
-
errors area: where error messages relevant to possible abort of the operation are displayed.
At the end of the operation by pressing OK, the system displays, the ed equipment parameters present into the Configuration Wizard window. 7. Save the ed configuration into a file by selecting Save File As command from File → Save → Save File As. The system will display Save This Config. File. Type the file name into the proper box (with "cfg" extension) and set the path to be used to save the file. 8. Press Save push button to finish.
After having installed the spare IDU proceed as follows: 1. Select Open File from Tools menu following this path: Tools menu → Equipment Configuration Wizard → File → Open → Open File. The system will display Select a Config. File window. 2. Select the wanted file and open it by pushing Open push button. The system will display the file content. 3. Press push button and select Configure Equipment as Current File. 4. Activate the box relevant to the equipment you wish to configuration file to (normally the local equipment) and select Configure Equipment as Current File. 5. Press OK. The system displays the Communication Status window where is pointed out: -
the operation status: in progress/completed
-
errors area: where error messages relevant to possible abort of operation are displayed.
6. Press OK to finish.
25.2.2
Addresses and routing table
and save 1. Select Open Address Configuration Template from Tools menu following this path: Tools menu → Equipment Configuration Wizard → File → Open → Open Address Configuration Template. The system will show the mask of the Address Comfiguration Template. 2. Press push button and select Get Current Type Configuration from Equipment. The system will display the Configuration File window. 3. Select the equipment you wish to a configuration from (normally the local equipment). 4. Press OK. The system displays the Communication Status window where is pointed out: -
the operation status: in progress
-
errors area: where error messages relavant to possible abort of the operation are displayed.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
167
At the end of the operation, the system displays, the equipment parameter present into the Configuration Wizard window. 5. Save the ed configuration into a file by selecting Save File As command from File → Save → Save File As The system will display the Save This Config. File window. Into the proper boxes type the file name (with "cfg" extension) and set the path to be used to save the file. 6. Press Save push button to finish.
1. Select Open File command from Tools menu following this path: Tools Equipment Configuration Wizard → File → Open → Open File. The system will display Select a Config. File window. 2. Select the wanted file and open it by pushing Open push button. The system will display the parameters contained into the file. 3. Press push button and select Configure Equipment as Current File. 4. Activate the box relevant to the equipment you wish to configuration file to (normally the local equipment). 5. Press OK. The system will display Type Selection window. Activate boxes IP port addresses configuration e Routing table . If OSPF facility is enabled, you can only select Standard (IP/Communication/OSPF) Settings. 6. Press OK. The system will show a warning indicating the possibility to procede the or not. 7. Press OK. The system will show the in progress. 8. At the end of the will be shown the file content.
25.2.3
Remote Element Table
and save 1. Select window Subnetwork Configuration Wizard from menu Tools. 2. Select equipment Local from Actual Configuration Area and then press Retrieve. In New configuration area is shown the list of remote equipment included the local. 3. Press Save to file. The system will show window Save remote element configuration file. 4. Save the file with Rel extension and then press Save to finish.
1. Select Subnetwork Configuration Wizard from menu Tool. 2. Press Read from file and then select the desired file (with Rel extension). 3. Press Open push button and then the system will show the file content into the New Configuration Area. 4. Select into the Actual configuration area the equipment you desire to , the list of the remote element included the local. 5. Press Send to send the list.
168
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
26
BACK UP FULL EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION WITHOUT POSSIBILITY OF MODIFYING THE PARAMETERS
26.1
SCOPE
This chapter describes the procedure to back up the full equipment configuration. This allows to recover the original equipment configuration in case of faulty IDU replacement with spare.
26.2
CONFIGURATION
Foreword: it is advisable to the configuration during the first installation. Proceed as follows: 1. Select Equipment Configuration Wizard from menu Tools; Equipment Configuration Wizard window will be displayed. 2. Select and then Backup Full Equipment Configuration; Template Selection window will be displayed. 3. Select the correct equipment template (in case of uncorrected choice the backup will be aborted). 4. Press OK and then select the equipment to be ed from Configuration File window. 5. Press OK and then edit the file name from Save backup as window. 6. Press Save; Equipment Configuration Wizard: Complete Backup window will appear. The window shows dynamically the backup procedure. If everything is OK, at the end of the will appear the word done showing the procedure success. 7. Press OK to finish.
26.3
CONFIGURATION
Once the spare IDU has been installed proceed as follows: 1. Select Equipment Configuration Wizard from menu Tools. Equipment Configuration Wizard window will be displayed. 2. Select and than Restore Full Equipment Configuration from Equipment Configuration Wizard. Select Backup File window will be displayed. 3. Select the wanted backup file with extension .bku and then press Open. Configuration File window will be displayed. 4. Select the equipment to and then press OK; Equipment Configuration Wizard: Complete restore window will be displayed. This window shows dynamically the operation. The word done indicates that has been successfully. 5. Press OK to finish. Warning: In case of EOC alarm proceed to restart the equipment.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
169
170
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Section 6. PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION
27
PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION
27.1
GENERAL
The radio equipment was designed to be easily programmed and supervised. The following tools are implemented to the purpose: •
SCT Subnetwork Craft Terminal + LCT Local Craft Terminal. They are used for remote and local control of a subnetwork consisted of a maximum of 100 ALC radio equipment.
•
NMS5–UX Network Management. It is used for the remote control of an entire network consisted of different SIAE equipment including ALC family radio equipment.
For details refer to relevant documentation. SCT/LCT documentation is available as help on–line.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
171
172
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Section 7. COMPOSITION
28
COMPOSITION OF THE INDOOR UNIT
28.1
GENERAL
The IDU is offered in the following versions: •
ALC IDU
•
ALC plus IDU.
28.2
ALC IDU PART NUMBER
The IDU is available in different versions, each of one identified by a specific part number. This P/N is shown on a label attached on the IDU mechanical structure, top left side.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
173
The P/N consists of seven digits with the following meaning: Tab.34 - P/N meaning Digit
Letter/number
Meaning
1
G
Functional assembly of units completed by a mechanical structure
2
A
AL family
3
I
4 to 7
0069 0073 0076 0078 0079 0080 0081 0084 0085 0086 0087 0088 0089 0090 0091
Indoor installation 16x2 - 75 Ohm - 1+1 16x2 - 75 Ohm - 1+1EOW 16x2 - 75 Ohm - 1+0 16x2 - coax - 1+0 8x2 - 75 - 1+0 8x2 - 120 - 1+0 8x2 - 120 - 1+1 16x2 - 120 - 1+1 8x2 - 75 - 1+1 16x2 - 120 - 1+0 8x2 - 120 - 1+0 EOW 8x2 - 120 - 1+1 EOW 4x2 - 120 - 1+0 V28 4x2 - 120 - 1+1 V28 16x2 - CX - 1+1 Eth
This part number together with unit serial number is printed on a label, SIAE or custom, positioned on unit cover.
28.3
ALC PLUS IDU PART NUMBER
IDU Plus Compact is available in different versions; each of them is identified by a Part Number code. This P/N is shown on a label attached to the IDU mechanical structure, on the left top. P/N code is composed by seven digits with the following meaning: Tab.35 - P/N meaning Digit
Letter/number
Meaning
1
G
Functional assembly of units completed by a mechanical structure
2
A
AL family
3
I
Indoor installation
4 to 7
0118 0119 0120 0121 0127 0128
16E1 16E1 32E1 32E1 32E1 32E1
1+0 1+1 1+0 1+1 1+0 + 3 Ethernet 1+1 + 3 Ethernet
The P/N and serial number of the unit is printed on the label placed on the unit coverplate.
174
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
29
COMPOSITION OF OUTDOOR UNIT
29.1
GENERAL
Two ODUs are available: AL ODU and AS ODU.
29.2
AL ODU
The AL ODU consists of a mechanical structure that houses all the transceiver circuitry. In 1+1 version the connection to the antenna is performed through a ive hybrid. Both transceiver and hybrid are offered in different versions depending on the operating bands, the antenna configuration etc... A label attached on the ODU structure shows the most significant parameters as: •
operating band
•
operating sub–band and sideband
•
part number
•
serial number
•
duplexer frequency
A further label is positioned on the hybrid body and shows the number of each transceiver and type of hybrid, balanced or unbalanced.
29.3
AS ODU
The ODU AS consists of mechanical structure formed by two shells. One shell houses the transceiver module, the other houses the branching module. Both the transceiver and the branching are available in different versions depending on the operating band, the antenna configuration, the channel filters etc..... To the purpose on the branching mechanical structure is available a label showing the ODU most significant parameters and the P/N of the whole unit.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
175
176
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Section 8. LISTS AND ASSISTANCE SERVICE
30
LIST OF FIGURES
Fig.1 - Components electrostatic charge sensitive .............................................................. 10 Fig.2 - Elasticised band .................................................................................................. 10 Fig.3 - Coiled cord ........................................................................................................ 10 Fig.4 - Laser diodes ....................................................................................................... 10 Fig.5 - 1+1 ODU typical configuration with integrated antenna ............................................ 17 Fig.6 - 1+1 IDU typical configuration ............................................................................ 18 Fig.7 - 1+1 equipment block diagram............................................................................... 19 Fig.8 - 1+0 non expandable equipment block diagram........................................................ 20 Fig.9 - IDU ALC 1+0 (2/4/8xE1)...................................................................................... 25 Fig.10 - IDU ALC 1+1 (2/4/8/16xE1) ............................................................................... 25 Fig.11 - IDU ALC 1+1 (up to 16xE1 coax. conn.) + Ethernet ............................................... 25 Fig.12 - IDU ALC plus 1+1 (2/4/5/8/10/16/20/32xE1) ....................................................... 25 Fig.13 - IDU ALC plus 1+1 (2/4/5/8/10/16/20/32xE1) + Ethernet ....................................... 25 Fig.14 - IDU 1+1 (up to 16x2 Mbit/s coax. conn.) + Ethernet module................................... 26 Fig.15 - 1+1 ODU with separated antenna ........................................................................ 26 Fig.16 - 1+0 ODU with integral antenna (pole mounting) .................................................... 27 Fig.17 - 1+1 ODU with integral antenna (pole mounting) .................................................... 27 Fig.18 - 1+1 ODU with separated antenna (wall mounting) ................................................. 28 Fig.19 - Line interface block diagram – Tx side .................................................................. 37 Fig.20 - 2x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing................................................................. 38 Fig.21 - 4x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing................................................................. 38 Fig.22 - 8x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing................................................................. 39
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
177
Fig.23 - 16x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing ............................................................... 40 Fig.24 - Line interface block diagram (Rx side) .................................................................. 41 Fig.25 - Radio interface block diagram ............................................................................. 42 Fig.26 - Main and peripheral controller connection ............................................................. 43 Fig.27 - IP/IPoverOSI protocol stack ................................................................................ 43 Fig.28 - IDU loopback .................................................................................................... 44 Fig.29 - LIM Ethernet 2 Mbit/s block diagram .................................................................... 51 Fig.30 - Tag control into field .......................................................................................... 52 Fig.31 - Output queues .................................................................................................. 52 Fig.32 - ToS/DS tag position into IP packets .................................................................. 53 Fig.33 - ToS/DS......................................................................................................... 53 Fig.34 - 1+0 ODU version............................................................................................... 59 Fig.35 - 1+1 hot stand–by version................................................................................... 59 Fig.36 - ODU block diagram ............................................................................................ 60 Fig.37 - 1+1 hot stand–by 1 antenna ............................................................................... 61 Fig.38 - 1+1 hot stand–by 2 antennas ............................................................................. 61 Fig.39 - ATPC operation ................................................................................................. 62 Fig.40 - DC/DC converter front coverplate ........................................................................ 63 Fig.41 - 24/48 V DC/DC converter connections to IDU 1+0 ................................................. 65 Fig.42 - 24/48 V DC/DC converter connections to IDU 1+1 ................................................. 66 Fig.43 - Grounding connections ....................................................................................... 69 Fig.44 - IDU ALC 1+1 (2x2/4x2/8x2/16x2 Mbit/s) ............................................................. 70 Fig.45 - ALC plus 32E1 (1+1).......................................................................................... 74 Fig.46 - ALC plus 32E1 + Ethernet (1+1).......................................................................... 74 Fig.47 - Pin-out Tributary IN/OUT 50 SCSI........................................................................ 75 Fig.48 - Antisliding strip ................................................................................................. 83 Fig.49 - 60–114 mm pole ing plate fixing ............................................................... 84 Fig.50 - Adapting kit for 219 mm pole .............................................................................. 85 Fig.51 - Mounting possible position .................................................................................. 86 Fig.52 - Possible position of the fast locking mechanism ..................................................... 87 Fig.53 - Band–it pole mounting ....................................................................................... 88 Fig.54 - ing plate................................................................................................ 89 Fig.55 - Position of the ODU body depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always vertical: handle at the left side. .......................................................................... 90 Fig.56 - ODU body reference tooth .................................................................................. 91 Fig.57 - Final ODU assembly of 1+1 version...................................................................... 92 Fig.58 - ODU grounding ................................................................................................. 93 Fig.59 - Wall ing plate ......................................................................................... 97 Fig.60 - with ODU fast locking mechanism ............................................................ 98 Fig.61 - Mounting possible positions................................................................................. 99 Fig.62 - Hybride with ODU fast locking ........................................................................... 100 Fig.63 - Position of the ODU body depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always vertical: handle at the left side. ........................................................................ 101 Fig.64 - ODU body reference tooth ................................................................................ 102
178
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
Fig.65 - Final ODU assembly of 1+1 version.................................................................... 103 Fig.66 - ODU grounding ............................................................................................... 104 Fig.67 - Centering ring position ..................................................................................... 109 Fig.68 - Antislide strip................................................................................................. 110 Fig.69 - mount on pole..................................................................................... 111 Fig.70 - ing plate position .................................................................................. 112 Fig.71 - E hole ............................................................................................................ 112 Fig.72 - Antenna installation on pole ................................................................... 113 Fig.73 - Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always horizontal. Handle at the right side. Vertical Horizontal ........................................................................................................ 113 Fig.74 - system for ODU housing and reference tooth in evidence .......................... 114 Fig.75 - ODU body reference tooth ................................................................................ 115 Fig.76 - ODU housing final position for vertical polarization ............................................... 116 Fig.77 - ODU housing final position for horizontal polarization............................................ 117 Fig.78 - Hybrid and twist disk ....................................................................................... 118 Fig.79 - Hybrid mount on pole ........................................................................... 119 Fig.80 - ODU housing final position for 1+1 version ......................................................... 120 Fig.81 - Vertical and horizontal adjustments ................................................................... 121 Fig.82 - Antenna aiming block....................................................................................... 122 Fig.83 - ODU grounding ............................................................................................... 123 Fig.84 - 1+0 pole mounting .......................................................................................... 129 Fig.85 - ODU body reference tooth ................................................................................ 130 Fig.86 - Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation is always horizontal. Handle at the right side. ................................ 131 Fig.87 - 1+0 ................................................................................................... 131 Fig.88 - ODU housing final position for both polarization ................................................... 132 Fig.89 - Antenna aiming ............................................................................................... 133 Fig.90 - ODU grounding ............................................................................................... 133 Fig.91 - Hybrid and twist disk ....................................................................................... 134 Fig.92 - Hybrid installation............................................................................................ 135 Fig.93 - 1+1 ODUs installation ...................................................................................... 135 Fig.94 - Pole installation of the .......................................................................... 138 Fig.95 - Installation of the hybrid on the pole (only for 1+1 version)....................... 139 Fig.96 - Installation of the ODU on the ................................................................ 140 Fig.97 - ODU grounding and connection of the cables to hybrid and antenna ....................... 141 Fig.98 - Detected voltage versus Rf received signal.......................................................... 145 Fig.99 - Local Lan–1 port to remote Lan–1 port connection ............................................... 146 Fig.100 - Selection of Ethernet Throughput ..................................................................... 147 Fig.101 - Switch general settings................................................................................... 148 Fig.102 - Lan–1 interface settings.................................................................................. 148 Fig.103 - Vlan settings for Lan–1 ................................................................................... 149 Fig.104 - Priority setting for Lan–1 and Internal Port ........................................................ 149 Fig.105 - Vlan settings for Internal Port .......................................................................... 150
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
179
Fig.106 - Vlan Configuration Table ................................................................................. 150 Fig.107 - Virtual Lan input and output settings at Lan–1 port ............................................ 151 Fig.108 - Vlan Configuration Table with some Vlans ......................................................... 152 Fig.109 - Add a new Vlan ID to Vlan Configuration Table with output tagged ....................... 153 Fig.110 - Layer 2 and Layer 3 priority management ......................................................... 153 Fig.111 - 3 to 1 port connections ................................................................................... 154 Fig.112 - Input and output setting for VLANs at Lan–1 port............................................... 155 Fig.113 - Output port properties for VLAN 3301............................................................... 155 Fig.114 - Typology 3 to 1, Virtual Lan Configuration ......................................................... 156 Fig.115 - Output Queue selection on the basis of TOS/DS priority................................... 156 Fig.116 - Output properties of VLAN 701 ........................................................................ 157 Fig.117 - Typology 3 to 1, Virtual Lan Configuration Table with Vlan................................... 158 Fig.118 - Queue selection ............................................................................................. 159 Fig.119 - Management of tagged frames according with their priority tag............................ 160 Fig.120 - Incoming packets at Lan–1 will exit to other ports unchanged according their incoming status. ........................................................................................................................ 161 Fig.121 - IDU front ...................................................................................................... 165
180
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
31
LIST OF TABLES
Tab.1 - Procedure for mouth to mouth resuscitation method ................................................ 9 Tab.2 Signal capacity......................................................................................................22 Tab.3 - Modulation and channel spacing ............................................................................22 Tab.4 - Nominal output power 1 dB tolerance - (1+0 version) ODU AL/ODU AS ......................23 Tab.5 - Guaranteed received threshold in 1+0 configuration (dBm) .......................................23 Tab.6 - Guaranteed received threshold in 1+0 configuration (dBm) .......................................23 Tab.7 - Power consumption (ODU AL/ODU AS) ...................................................................24 Tab.8 - Power supply connector consumption .....................................................................24 Tab.9 - IDU/ODU dimensions ...........................................................................................24 Tab.10 - IDU/ODU weight................................................................................................24 Tab.11 - Nominal output power ± 1 dB tolerance................................................................55 Tab.12 - Transmit alarm priority ......................................................................................58 Tab.13 - Characteristics of the cables ...............................................................................68 Tab.14 - Tributary connector pin–out (male 25 pin SUB–D)..................................................71 Tab.15 - 100BaseT connector pin–out for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection ..........................72 Tab.16 - Connector pin–out for 64 kbit/s channel – V.11 interface ........................................72 Tab.17 - Connector pin–out – V.28 interface .....................................................................72 Tab.18 - Connector pin–out – RS232 PPP interface ............................................................73 Tab.19 - in/out connector pin–out ............................................................................73 Tab.20 - Tributary IN/OUT - 75 Ohm ................................................................................75 Tab.21 - Tributary IN/OUT - 120 Ohm...............................................................................76 Tab.22 - Q3/1 and Q3/2 100BaseT connector pin-out for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection .....77 Tab.23 - Connector pin-out RS232 PPP interface.................................................................77 Tab.24 - CH1 connector pin-out for 9600 bit/s synchronous V.24 interface.............................78 Tab.25 - CH1 connector pin-out for 9600 bit/s asynchronous V.24 interface ...........................78 Tab.26 - CH2 connector pin-out for 64 kbit/s channel - V.11 interface ...................................78 Tab.27 - IN/OUT connector pin-out............................................................................79 Tab.28 - Tightening torque ..............................................................................................81 Tab.29 - Tightening torque ..............................................................................................82 Tab.30 - Tightening torque .............................................................................................95 Tab.31 - Tightening torque ..............................................................................................95 Tab.32 .......................................................................................................................107 Tab.33 .......................................................................................................................127 Tab.34 - P/N meaning .................................................................................................. 174 Tab.35 - P/N meaning .................................................................................................. 174
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
181
182
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
32
ASSISTANCE SERVICE
The assistance service provided by Siae Microelettronica will be in compliance, if stipulated, to what specified in the Agreement of Software Maintenance. To exploit this service, fill in all its parts the Module for the notification of bad SW operation (RQ.00961) and send it to the following address: SIAE Microelettronica S.p.A via Michelangelo Buonarroti, 21 20093 Cologno Monzese Milano - Italy www.siaemic.it Fax + (39) 02 25391585 e-mail [email protected]
32.1
RQ.00961 MODULE
Each RQ916 module can contain at most one signalling. The information required for the signalling of the bad operation. Warning. The compiling of the parts General Information (Siae only), Trouble notified by, Reserved to Siae Department and Validation manager are at charge of the Siae personnel.
Section – Trouble Identification -
SIAE product name. Identifier or SIAE code of the product whose bad operation has been detected.
-
Version. Version of the sw product whose bad operation has been detected
-
Documentation Type. Identifier of the document where the problem has been detected.
-
Revision. Revision of the document where the problem has been detected.
-
Volume N. Number of the volume of the document where the problem has been detected.
-
Page N. Number of the page, into the volume, where the problem has been detected.
-
Typology. Severity of the detected bad operation: -
Critical, if it prevents the use of a main functionality of the product;
-
Important, if it prevents the use of a secondary functionality of the product;
-
Disturbing, if occasionally and in difficultly reproducible conditions, it prevents the use of a main functionality of the product;
-
Minor, if very seldom it prevents the use of a secondary functionality without important consequences;
-
Suggestion, if no functionality of the product is damaged but some aspects (e.g.: interface) can be improved.
-
Recurrent. Possibility (Yes) or not (No) to cause the bad operation after the same sequence of inputs given to the product.
-
Repeatable. Possibility (Yes) or not (No) to reproduce the detected bad operation.
-
Annexes. Possibility (Yes) or not (No) of annexed to the NM and their possible number.
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
183
184
-
Title. Title of the bad operation.
-
Description. Clear and concise description of the bad operation, comprehensive of the edge conditions and, when possible and applicable, of the reference to the test (identifier and version of the technical documentation, test identifier).
AL - MN.00142.E - 009
GENERAL INFORMATION (SIAE ONLY) Object Submitted
Software
Documentation
Number
Hardware
Distribution List: Quality Assurance
TROUBLE NOTIFIED BY Siae Operator Name
_______________________________
Date
Customer Report Ref.
_______________________________
Date
_______________________________
Customer Name Reference _______________________________
Tel
_______________________________
Company/Dept.
_______________________________
_______________________________
Contract N
_______________________________
Address TROUBLE IDENTIFICATION
SW/FW failures SIAE product name
___________________________________________________
Version
______
Documentation type
___________________________________________________
Revision
______
Volume N.
___________________________________________________
Documentation
Page N. Typology
Critical
Important
Recurrent
Yes
No
Repeatable
Yes
No
Annexes
Yes: N°
No
Disturbing
Minor
Suggestion
Title: Description (including enviranmental conditions):
RESERVED TO SIAE DEPARTMENT Trouble
Accepted_Open Reasons
Rejected Notes Analysis performed by
Date
Expected Closing Date
Date
Approved by
CORRECTIVE ACTION DESCRIPTION
FIXED VALIDATION MANAGER
Executed by MN
Closed Open
Verified by
Date
Notes
Quality Record Module TROUBLE REPORT Siae Microelettronica all rights reserved.
Issued by Terzo L.
Approved by Gaviraghi S. Document Ref. RQ.00961
Date 24/09/02
Page 1/1 Rev/Ver 003
Related Documents 3h463d
Manual Siae Alc Plus 1l3265
December 2019 42
Siae Microelettronica Alc Manual - Mn00142e-007 6s136g
December 2019 131
Alc Pdh Radio Technical Training(siae Microwave) y313f
December 2020 0
Siae - Sdh Manual - General 3z5s
December 2019 32
Alc Catalog 2g3r5d
December 2019 50
Siae [ De Control] 2j5t6m
December 2019 50More Documents from "Felipe Kazahaya" e3w41
4p345f
December 2020 0
Manual Siae Alc Plus 1l3265
December 2019 42
4p345f
July 2022 0
4p345f
June 2022 0
Catalogo Soluciones Para Formacion 2011_12 (sp) 3h6h4a
March 2023 0